From 22edf83230b76ec619a24effc582ed6a2350d250 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: mkultraWasHere Date: Wed, 19 Aug 2026 14:46:39 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 01/11] =?UTF-8?q?chore:=20repo=20hygiene=20=E2=80=94=20ver?= =?UTF-8?q?sioning,=20licensing,=20privacy,=20PDF=20download?= MIME-Version: 1.0 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit - Bump version to 0.5.0 in pyproject.toml (matches README badge) - Update Node requirement to 20+ (matches pdfjs-dist engine) - Remove uv.lock from .gitignore and commit lockfile - Self-host JetBrains Mono font, remove Google Fonts dependency - Fix false privacy claim in README comparison table - Add PDF download button to viewer header - Remove vendored system packages (natbib.sty, fancyhdr.sty) that violate LPPL redistribution terms — TeX Live provides them - Bundle acmart.dtx alongside acmart.cls per LPPL requirements - Add LPPL-1.3c license text and THIRD_PARTY_LICENSES manifest Co-Authored-By: Claude --- .gitignore | 1 - README.md | 6 +- pyproject.toml | 2 +- templates/LPPL-1.3c.txt | 416 + templates/SOURCES.md | 6 + templates/THIRD_PARTY_LICENSES | 82 + templates/acm/acmart.dtx | 9105 +++++++++++++++++ templates/iclr2026/fancyhdr.sty | 485 - templates/iclr2026/natbib.sty | 1246 --- templates/icml2026/fancyhdr.sty | 864 -- ui/backend/server.py | 14 +- ui/frontend/index.html | 3 - ui/frontend/src/components/PdfViewer.tsx | 8 + .../src/fonts/JetBrainsMono-latin.woff2 | Bin 0 -> 31340 bytes ui/frontend/src/index.css | 9 + uv.lock | 4379 ++++++++ 16 files changed, 14020 insertions(+), 2606 deletions(-) create mode 100644 templates/LPPL-1.3c.txt create mode 100644 templates/THIRD_PARTY_LICENSES create mode 100644 templates/acm/acmart.dtx delete mode 100644 templates/iclr2026/fancyhdr.sty delete mode 100644 templates/iclr2026/natbib.sty delete mode 100644 templates/icml2026/fancyhdr.sty create mode 100644 ui/frontend/src/fonts/JetBrainsMono-latin.woff2 create mode 100644 uv.lock diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore index ddda72a..d09febc 100644 --- a/.gitignore +++ b/.gitignore @@ -11,5 +11,4 @@ __pycache__/ .pytest_cache/ .ruff_cache/ .venv/ -uv.lock .DS_Store diff --git a/README.md b/README.md index 1a1bc45..705acdb 100644 --- a/README.md +++ b/README.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ # ALFRED -![Version](https://img.shields.io/badge/version-0.5.0-008080) ![Python](https://img.shields.io/badge/python-3.10%2B-008080) ![Node](https://img.shields.io/badge/node-18%2B-008080) ![License](https://img.shields.io/badge/license-MIT-008080) +![Version](https://img.shields.io/badge/version-0.5.0-008080) ![Python](https://img.shields.io/badge/python-3.10%2B-008080) ![Node](https://img.shields.io/badge/node-20%2B-008080) ![License](https://img.shields.io/badge/license-MIT-008080) **A**gentic **L**atex **f**or **R**esearch, **E**diting, and **D**rafting. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Reports are written to `capabilities/reports/`. Review records are saved to `rev ### Prerequisites - **Python 3.10+** -- **Node.js 18+** +- **Node.js 20+** - **TeX Live** (basic install works for most templates — includes `latexmk` and `biber`) - **[uv](https://docs.astral.sh/uv/)** (used by the launcher for venv setup) - Optional: `latexdiff` for track-changes PDFs (`brew install latexdiff` on macOS) @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ There are several great projects bringing AI to academic writing — each with a | **Approach** | Agent-first — you talk, it writes | Editor with inline AI | Desktop editor with AI agents | Chrome extension + web app | Chrome extension for Overleaf | | **Autonomy** | Full — writes sections, builds, searches, cites | Inline edits, agent-assisted citations | AI-assisted editing | Copilot suggestions | Multi-agent patches | | **LLM support** | Any (Claude, GPT, Gemini, Mistral, local, OpenRouter) | GPT only | Any (Claude, GPT, Gemini, DeepSeek, local) | Locked to their API | Configurable | -| **Runs locally** | Yes — nothing leaves your machine | No (cloud) | Yes | No (cloud) | Cloud (self-host option) | +| **Runs locally** | Yes — server is local; content is sent to configured LLM provider and optional search APIs | No (cloud) | Yes | No (cloud) | Cloud (self-host option) | | **Research workflows** | Lit review, claim verification, peer review, source analysis | Lit search, citations | No | Citation search (ArXiv) | Literature retrieval | | **PDF preview** | Live auto-reload | Yes | Yes | Via Overleaf | Via Overleaf | | **Conference templates** | 12 built-in formats | Yes | No | Yes | Via Overleaf | diff --git a/pyproject.toml b/pyproject.toml index c193804..d35dc1f 100644 --- a/pyproject.toml +++ b/pyproject.toml @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ [project] name = "alfred" -version = "0.4.0" +version = "0.5.0" description = "Agentic LaTeX for Research, Editing, and Drafting" license = "MIT" requires-python = ">=3.10" diff --git a/templates/LPPL-1.3c.txt b/templates/LPPL-1.3c.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b57559 --- /dev/null +++ b/templates/LPPL-1.3c.txt @@ -0,0 +1,416 @@ +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04 + +Copyright 1999 2002-2008 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under +which the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed. + +You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright +and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly +suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but +it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is +unrelated to TeX. + +The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE', +below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors +who are considering distributing their works under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed +and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of +that work may be distributed. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +DEFINITIONS +=========== + +In this license document the following terms are used: + + `Work' + Any work being distributed under this License. + + `Derived Work' + Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work. + + `Modification' + Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable + law -- for example, the production of a file containing an + original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of + such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or + translated into another language. + + `Modify' + To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any + applicable law. + + `Distribution' + Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in + whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to) + making any electronic components of the Work accessible by + file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file + systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS). + + `Compiled Work' + A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it + is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may + include using installation facilities provided by the Work, + transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or + other activities. Note that modification of any installation + facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work. + + `Current Maintainer' + A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is + no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under + any applicable law. + + `Base Interpreter' + A program or process that is normally needed for running or + interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. + + A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these + are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each + external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used + interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the + license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a + `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the + `LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `TeX language'. + + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no +requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work. + +2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you +received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered +modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived +Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause. + +3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a +complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2 +above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that +the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly +as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work +directly from the Work. + +4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without +restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may +also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including +Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works +distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to +be updated versions of the Work. + +5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify +your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work, +and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on +the Derived Work. + +6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met +for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states +in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only +the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption +to a component of the Work. + + a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement + for a component of the Work when that component is used with the + Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work + identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work + clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version + of this component to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter. + + b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices + detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a + prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part + of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log + of the changes. + + c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons, + including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version + of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to) + the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the + Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that + they do provide such support for the Derived Work. + + d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work: + + 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; + if your distribution of a modified component is made by + offering access to copy the modified component from a + designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy + the Work from the same or some similar place meets this + condition, even though third parties are not compelled to + copy the Work along with the modified component; + + 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete, + unmodified copy of the Work. + +7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as +the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled +Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with +regard to the Derived Work. + +8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not +apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it +becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as +it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above. + +9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative +format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is +then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or +nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of +applying that process. + +10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license + provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in + Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have + to honor the rest of the conditions in this license. + + b. If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, that + Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of + itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the + restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work. + +11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to +the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating +such works with the Work by any means. + +12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent +complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a +particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you assume +the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing +will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the components of the +Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or modify the Work as +permitted above, be liable to you for damages, including any general, +special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of any use of +the Work or out of inability to use the Work (including, but not limited +to, loss of data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by +anyone as a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other +programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK +======================= + +The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder +explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in +the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder +or simply that it is `author-maintained'. + +The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer +who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error +reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail +address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge +or act upon these error reports. + +The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there +is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current +Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means +of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other +significant signs of active maintenance. + +You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with +any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role. + +If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of +the Work through the following steps: + + 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and + the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of + an Internet or similar search. + + 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work + is still maintained. + + a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer + to update their communication data within one month. + + b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active + maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce + within the pertinent community your intention to take over + maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be + done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.) + + 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass + maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect + immediately upon announcement. + + b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright + Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you, + then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. + + 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above + and after three months your intention is challenged neither by + the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other + people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as + to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer. + + 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes + reachable once more within three months of a change completed + under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must + become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided + they then update their communication data within one month. + +A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact +that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license. + +If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should +immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous +statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also +announce your new status to the same pertinent community as +in 2b) above. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE +====================================================== + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then +do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead, +distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text +of this license as a model for your own license, but your license +should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that +your work is distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any +license are encouraged to read it. + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for +distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such +modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or +it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified +version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions +of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse, +cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your +best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public +one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work +without altering any of its licensed components. + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work +was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a +statement that the distribution and/or modification of that +component is constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2008 M. Y. Name + % + % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 2008 or later. + % + % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. + % + % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name. + % + % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + % and the derived file pig.sty. + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions +given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring +to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being +generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter' +referring to any `LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright Holder' and +`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. + +If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your +Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'. +However, we recommend that you use `maintained', as the Maintenance +section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to +the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it +yourself. + +Derived Works That Are Not Replacements +--------------------------------------- + +Several clauses of the LPPL specify means to provide reliability and +stability for the user community. They therefore concern themselves +with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used as a +(compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original Work. If +this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are reused for a +completely different task), then clauses 6b and 6d shall not apply. + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes the Work + + The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the + files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line such as: + + % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be + entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise + the Work. + diff --git a/templates/SOURCES.md b/templates/SOURCES.md index 0adda11..29aa6a1 100644 --- a/templates/SOURCES.md +++ b/templates/SOURCES.md @@ -24,3 +24,9 @@ The current template assets were retrieved on 2026-08-17 from: The stable `neurips` template intentionally duplicates the three files in `neurips2026`. A regression test keeps the alias byte-identical to the pinned version. + +Standard LaTeX packages (`natbib`, `fancyhdr`) that some conference kits +bundle are not vendored here — they are available in TeX Live. The ACM +`acmart.dtx` source is bundled alongside `acmart.cls` per LPPL +distribution requirements. See `THIRD_PARTY_LICENSES` for the full +license manifest. diff --git a/templates/THIRD_PARTY_LICENSES b/templates/THIRD_PARTY_LICENSES new file mode 100644 index 0000000..928a246 --- /dev/null +++ b/templates/THIRD_PARTY_LICENSES @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +# Third-party license manifest + +ALFRED's templates directory contains conference style files vendored from +their official sources (listed in SOURCES.md). These files are NOT covered +by the project's root MIT license. Each file retains its original license +as documented below. + +A copy of the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) v1.3c is included at +templates/LPPL-1.3c.txt. + +## LPPL-licensed files + +### ACM (templates/acm/) +- acmart.cls — LPPL 1.3c+, Copyright ACM. Generated from acmart.dtx + (bundled alongside per LPPL distribution requirements). +- ACM-Reference-Format.bst — Public domain. + +### ICLR 2026 (templates/iclr2026/) +- iclr2026_conference.bst — LPPL 1+, generated from merlin.mbs. + +### ICML 2026 (templates/icml2026/) +- icml2026.bst — LPPL 1+, generated from merlin.mbs. + +### AAAI 2026 (templates/aaai2026/) +- aaai2026.bst — LPPL 1+, generated from merlin.mbs. + +### ACL (templates/acl/) +- acl_natbib.bst — LPPL 1+, generated from merlin.mbs. urlbst + modifications Copyright 2002-2023 Norman Gray, also LPPL. + +### CVPR 2026 (templates/cvpr2026/) +- ieeenat_fullname.bst — LPPL 1+. + +### IEEE / NDSS (templates/ieee/, templates/ndss2026/) +- IEEEtran.cls — LPPL 1.3, Copyright 2001-2015 Michael Shell. +- IEEEtran.bst — LPPL 1.3, Copyright 2003-2008 Michael Shell. + +## Venue-specific files (distributed by conferences for author use) + +These files are provided by their respective conferences as part of +official author kits intended for paper preparation and submission. +They are redistributed here from the sources documented in SOURCES.md. + +### NeurIPS (templates/neurips/, templates/neurips2024/, templates/neurips2026/) +- neurips_20*.sty — NeurIPS formatting instructions. No explicit license + stated. Distributed by NeurIPS for author use. + +### CVPR 2026 (templates/cvpr2026/) +- cvpr.sty — CVPR author kit. No explicit license stated. + +### ICLR 2026 (templates/iclr2026/) +- iclr2026_conference.sty — ICLR master template. No explicit license stated. + +### ICML 2026 (templates/icml2026/) +- icml2026.sty — ICML style file. No explicit license stated. +- algorithm.sty, algorithmic.sty — Copyright 1994 Peter Williams. + No explicit license stated. + +### AAAI 2026 (templates/aaai2026/) +- aaai2026.sty — AAAI author kit. States "may not modify this file." + +### ACL (templates/acl/) +- acl.sty — ACL style file. No explicit license stated. + +### NDSS 2026 (templates/ndss2026/) +- ndss2026.cls — NDSS template. No explicit license stated. + +### USENIX (templates/usenix/) +- usenix-2020-09.sty — USENIX style file. No explicit license stated. + +### Springer LNCS (templates/lncs/) +- llncs.cls — Springer Verlag. Distributed as part of the official + LNCS proceedings template. No explicit open-source license stated. +- splncs04.bst — Springer Verlag. No explicit license stated. + +## System packages (not vendored) + +The following standard LaTeX packages are required by some templates but +are NOT bundled in this repository. They are available in TeX Live: + +- natbib.sty (LPPL) — used by iclr2026, acl +- fancyhdr.sty (LPPL) — used by iclr2026, icml2026 diff --git a/templates/acm/acmart.dtx b/templates/acm/acmart.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b60702d --- /dev/null +++ b/templates/acm/acmart.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,9105 @@ +% \iffalse +% +% Copyright 2016-2026, Association for Computing Machinery +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either +% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any +% later version. +% The latest version of the license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of +% LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. +% +% The Current Maintainer of this work is Boris Veytsman, +% +% +% This work consists of the file acmart.dtx, the derived file +% acmart.cls, the files ACM-Reference-Format.bst, templates +% acmengage.dtx, samples.dtx, and derived templates acmcp.tex, +% acmengage.tex, acmlarge.tex, acmmanuscript.tex, +% acmsmall-biblatex.tex, acmsmall-conf.tex, acmsmall-submission.tex, +% acmsmall-tagged.tex, acmsmall.tex, acmtog-conf.tex, acmtog.tex, +% sigconf-authordraft.tex, sigconf-biblatex.tex, sigconf-i13n.tex, +% sigconf-lualatex.tex, sigconf-tagged.tex, sigconf.tex, sigplan.tex. + +% +% \fi +% +% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +% +% +% \MakeShortVerb{|} +% \def\guide{acmguide} +% \iffalse +% From +% http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/117892/can-i-convert-a-string-to-catcode-11 by egreg +% \fi +% \begingroup +% \everyeof{\noexpand} +% \endlinechar=-1 +% \xdef\currentjob{\scantokens\expandafter{\jobname}} +% \endgroup +% +% \ifx\currentjob\guide\OnlyDescription\fi +% \GetFileInfo{acmart.dtx} +% \title{\LaTeX{} Class for the \emph{Association for Computing +% Machinery}\thanks{\copyright 2016--2026, Association for Computing Machinery}} +% \author{Boris Veytsman\thanks{% +% \href{mailto:borisv@lk.net}{\texttt{borisv@lk.net}}, +% \href{mailto:boris@varphi.com}{\texttt{boris@varphi.com}}}} +% \date{\filedate, \fileversion} +% \maketitle +% \begin{abstract} +% This package provides a class for typesetting publications of +% the Association for Computing Machinery. +% \end{abstract} +% \tableofcontents +% +% \clearpage +% +%\section{Introduction} +%\label{sec:intro} +% +% The Association for Computing +% Machinery\footnote{\url{http://www.acm.org/}} is the world's largest +% educational and scientific computing society, which delivers +% resources that advance computing as a science and a +% profession. It was one of the +% early adopters of \TeX\ for its typesetting. +% +% It provided several different classes for a number of journals and +% conference proceedings. Unfortunately during the years since these +% classes were written, the code was patched many times, and +% supporting different versions of the classes became difficult. +% +% This new consolidated template package replaces all previous +% independent class files and packages and provides a single +% up-to-date LaTeX package with optional calls. The package uses only +% free \TeX\ packages and fonts included in \TeX Live, Mik\TeX\ and +% other popular \TeX\ distributions. The new ACM templates use a new +% font set (libertine) which will need to be installed on your machine +% before using the templates. Please download and install the +% libertine font set before writing your paper. Fonts used in the +% template cannot be substituted; margin adjustments are not allowed. +% +% I am grateful to +% Michael D.~Adams, +% Leif Andersen, +% Lawrence Christopher Angrave, +% Dirk Beyer, +% Andrew Black, +% Joachim Breitner, +% Yegor Bugayenko, +% Benjamin Byholm, +% John Collins, +% Roberto Di Cosmo, +% Nils Anders Danielsson, +% Michael Ekstrand, +% Matthew Fluet, +% Paolo G.~Giarrusso, +% Ben Greenman, +% Enrico Gregorio, +% Jamie Davis, +% Ulrike Fischer, +% Jason Hemann, +% Peter Kemp, +% David F. Kotz, +% Luis Leiva, +% Ben Liblit, +% Rholais Lii, +% LianTze Lim, +% Kuldeep S. Meel, +% Kai Mindermann, +% Frank Mittelbach, +% Serguei Mokhov, +% Ross Moore, +% John Owens, +% Joel Nider, +% Scott Pakin, +% Tobias Pape, +% Henning Pohl, +% Philip Quinn, +% Mathias Rav, +% Andreas Reichinger, +% Matteo Riondato, +% Craig Rodkin, +% Bernard Rous, +% Feras Saad, +% Kerry A. Seitz, Jr., +% M Senthilkumar, +% David Shamma, +% Gabriel Scherer, +% Kartik Singhal, +% Christoph Sommer, +% Stephen Spencer, +% Shin Hwei Tan, +% Daniel Thomas, +% Shari Trewin, +% Zack Weinberg, +% John Wickerson +% and many others for their invaluable help. +% +% The development version of the package is available at +% \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart}. +% +%\section{User's guide} +%\label{sec:ug} +% +% +% This class uses many commands and customizaton options, so it might +% appear intimidating for a casual user. Do not panic! Many of these +% commands and options can be safely left with their default values +% or the values recommended by your conference or journal editors. If +% you have problems or questions, do not hesitate to ask me directly +% or the community at \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart}, +% \url{https://tex.stackexchange.com} or the closest \TeX\ Users +% Group. The world-wide \TeX\ Users Group is at +% \url{https://tug.org/}; please consider joining us if you use \TeX\ +% regularly. +% +%\subsection{Installation} +%\label{sec:ug_install} +% +% Most probably, you already have this package installed in your +% favorite \TeX\ distribution; if not, you may want to upgrade. You +% may need to upgrade it anyway since this package uses a number of +% relatively recent packages, especially the ones related to fonts. +% +% The latest released version of this package can be found on CTAN: +% \url{https://www.ctan.org/pkg/acmart}. The development version can +% be found on GitHub: \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart}. +% At this address you can file a bug report---or even contribute your +% own enhancement by making a pull request. +% +% Please note that the version on Github is a development (or +% experimental) version: please download it for testing new features. +% The production version is the one on CTAN and ACM sites. +% +% Most users should not attempt to install this package themselves +% but should rather rely on their \TeX\ distributions to provide it. If you +% decide to install the package yourself, follow the standard rules: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item Run |latex acmart.ins|. This will produce the file +% |acmart.cls| +% \item Put the files |acmart.cls|, |acm-jdslogo.png|, +% and |ACM-Reference-Format.bst| +% in places where \LaTeX{} can find them (see \cite{TeXFAQ} or +% the documentation for your \TeX{} system).\label{item:install} +% \item Update the database of file names. Again, see \cite{TeXFAQ} +% or the documentation for your \TeX{} system for the system-specific +% details.\label{item:update} +% \item The file |acmart.pdf| provides the documentation for the +% package. (This is probably the file you are reading now.) +% \end{enumerate} +% As an alternative to items~\ref{item:install} and~\ref{item:update} +% you can just put the files in the working directory where your +% |.tex| file is. +% +% +% This class uses a number of other packages. They are included in all +% major \TeX\ distributions (\TeX Live, Mac\TeX, Mik\TeX) of 2015 and +% later, so you probably have them installed. Just in case here is +% the list of these packages: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item \textsl{amsart}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/amsart}, +% \item \textsl{babel}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/babel}, +% \item \textsl{balance}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/balance}, +% \item \textsl{booktabs}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/booktabs}, +% \item \textsl{caption}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/caption}, +% \item \textsl{cmap}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/cmap}, +% \item \textsl{comment}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/comment}, +% \item \textsl{doclicense}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/doclicense}, +% \item \textsl{draftwatermark}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/draftwatermark}, +% \item \textsl{environ}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/environ}, +% \item \textsl{etoolbox}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/etoolbox}, +% \item \textsl{fancyhdr}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/fancyhdr}, +% \item \textsl{float}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/float}, +% \item \textsl{fontenc}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/fontenc}, +% \item \textsl{framed}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/framed}, +% \item \textsl{geometry}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/geometry}, +% \item \textsl{graphicx}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/graphicx}, +% \item \textsl{hyperref}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperref}, +% \item \textsl{hyperxmp}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/hyperxmp}, +% \item \textsl{iftex}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/iftex}, +% \item \textsl{libertine}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/libertine}, +% \item \textsl{manyfoot}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/manyfoot}, +% \item \textsl{microtype}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/microtype}, +% \item \textsl{natbib}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/natbib}, +% \item \textsl{newtxmath}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/newtxmath}, +% \item \textsl{pbalance}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/pbalance}, +% \item \textsl{pifont}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/pifont}, +% \item \textsl{refcount}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/refcount}, +% \item \textsl{setspace}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/setspace}, +% \item \textsl{totpages}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/totpages}, +% \item \textsl{unicode-math}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/unicode-math}, +% \item \textsl{xcolor}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/xcolor}, +% \item \textsl{xkeyval}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/xkeyval}, +% \item \textsl{xstring}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/xstring}, +% \item \textsl{zi4}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/zi4}, +% \item \textsl{zref-savepos}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/zref-savepos}, +% \item \textsl{zref-user}, \url{https://ctan.org/pkg/zref-user}. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +%\subsection{Invocation and options} +%\label{sec:invocation} +% +% To use this class, put in the preamble of your document +% \begin{quote} +% \cs{documentclass}\oarg{options}|{acmart}| +% \end{quote} +% There are several options corresponding to the type of the document and +% its general appearance. They are described below. Generally +% speaking, the options have |key=value| forms, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[format=acmsmall, screen=true, review=false]{acmart} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% The option |format| describes the format of the output. There are +% several possible values for this option, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[format=acmtog]{acmart} +% \end{verbatim} +% Actually the words |format=| can be omitted, e.g., +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[acmtog, review=false]{acmart} +% \end{verbatim} +% The possible formats are listed in Table~\ref{tab:opts_format}. +% Note that formats starting with |acm| are intended for journals, +% transactions, and course materials, while formats starting with +% |sig| are intended for proceedings published as books. +% +% Sometimes conference proceedings are published as a special issue +% (or issues) of an ACM journal. In this case, you should use the +% journal format. The templates |sample-acmsmall-conf.tex| and +% |sample-acmtog-conf.tex| show how to enter conference information. +% Note that you need to comment out |\acmJournal{...}| line for such +% papers to get the conference information in the footers and headers. +% The |acmtog| format then puts the conference name, date and venue +% into the footers instead of the journal name, volume, issue and +% article number. The |acmsmall| format uses the headers and footers +% of the proceedings formats: the conference name, date and venue in +% the headers, and no folios, since the page numbers of such a paper +% are assigned by the proceedings rather than by the article. If you +% do want the folios, say |\settopmatter{printfolios=true}| after +% \cs{acmConference}. +% +% \begin{table} +% \centering +% \caption{The possible values for the \texttt{format} option} +% \label{tab:opts_format} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{>{\ttfamily}lX} +% \toprule +% \normalfont Value & Meaning\\ +% \midrule +% manuscript & A manuscript. This is the default. \\ +% acmsmall & Small single-column format. Used for ACMJCSS, +% ACMJDS, AILET, CIE, CSUR, +% FAC, GAMES, JACM, JATS, JDIQ, JDS, JEA, JERIC, +% JETC, JRC, PACMCGIT, PACMHCI, PACMMOD, PACMNET, +% PACMPL, PACMSE, POMACS, TAAS, TACCESS, TACO, TAIS, TAISAP, +% TALG, TALLIP (formerly TALIP), TCPS, TDS, +% TEAC, TECS, TELO, THRI, TIIS, TIOT, TISSEC, TIST, TKDD, TMIS, +% TOCE, TOCHI, TOCL, +% TOCS, TOCT, TODAES, TODS, TOIS, TOIT, TOMACS, TOMM (formerly +% TOMCCAP), TOMPECS, TOMS, TOPC, TOPLAS, TOPML, TOPS, TORS +% TOS, TOSEM, TOSN, TQC, TRETS, +% TSAS, TSC, TSLP, and TWEB, including special issues. \\ +% acmlarge & Large single-column format. Used for DLT, DTRAP, HEALTH, +% IMWUT, JOCCH, and TAP, including special issues. \\ +% acmtog & Large double-column format. Used for +% TOG, including annual conference Technical Papers.\\ +% sigconf & Proceedings format for most ACM +% conferences (with the exception of SIGPLAN) and all ICPS +% volumes.\\ +% sigplan & Proceedings format for SIGPLAN conferences.\\ +% acmengage & ACM EngageCSEdu Course materials.\\ +% acmcp & ACM cover page. \\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% +% Starting in 2020, ACM retired formats |sigchi| and |sigchi-a|. +% SIGCHI conferences now use |sigconf| format for their publications. +% If a file uses |sigchi| format, a warning is issued, and the format +% is automatically switched to |sigconf|. Format |sigchi-a| can be +% used for non-ACM documents only (see Section~\ref{sec:sigchi-a}). +% The format |acmcp| is used for ACM cover pages discussed in +% Section~\ref{sec:ug_acmcp}. +% +% +% There are several Boolean options that can take |true| or |false| +% values. They are listed in Table~\ref{tab:opts_bool}. The words +% |=true| can be omitted when setting a Boolean option, so instead of +% |screen=true| one can write just |screen|, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[acmsmall, screen, review]{acmart} +% \end{verbatim} +% The option |review| is useful when combined with the |manuscript| format +% option. It provides a version suitable for reviewers and +% copy editors. +% +% Two samples in the |samples| directory, |manuscript| and +% |acmsmall-submission|, show manuscripts formatted for submission to +% ACM. +% +% The default for the option |screen| depends on the publication. At +% present it is |false| for all publications \emph{but} PACM, since +% PACM is now electronic-only. Thus PACM titles~(see +% Table~\ref{tab:pubs}) set this option to |true|. In the future this +% option may involve additional features suitable for on-screen +% versions of articles. +% +% The option |natbib| is used when the corresponding +% \BibTeX\ style is based on |natbib|. In most cases you do not need +% to set it. See +% Section~\ref{sec:ug_bibliography}. +% +% The option |anonymous| is used +% for anonymous review processes and causes all author information to be +% obscured. +% +% The option |timestamp| is used to include a time stamp in the +% footer of each page. When preparing a document, this can help avoid +% confusing different revisions. The footer also includes the page range of +% the document. This helps detect missing pages in hard copies. +% +% The option |authordraft| is intended for authors' drafts that are not +% intended for distribution. It typesets a copyright block to give the +% author an idea of its size and the overall size of the paper but +% overprints it with the phrase ``Unpublished working draft. Not for +% distribution.'', which is also used as a watermark. This option sets +% |timestamp| and |review| to |true|, but these can be +% overriden by setting these options to |false| \emph{after} +% setting |authordraft| to |true|. +% +% The option |balance| determines whether the last page in the two +% column mode has balanced columns. By default it is |true|; however, +% it may lead to problems for some documents. When there are many +% figures near the end of the document, the attempts to balance +% columns may lead to the loss of the figures. Set this option to |false| if +% you encounter problems. An alternative is the +% (experimental) option |pbalance|, which uses the new package +% |pbalance|. You may want to try |pbalance=true| to see if you get +% better results. +% +% The option |urlbreakonhyphens| determines whether URLs can be split +% between lines after hyphens. By default it is true. Set it to +% |false| to disallow these breaks. +% +% \begin{table} +% \centering +% \caption{Boolean options} +% \label{tab:opts_bool} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{>{\ttfamily}l>{\ttfamily}lX} +% \toprule +% \normalfont Option & \normalfont Default & Meaning\\ +% \midrule +% review & false & A review version: lines are numbered and +% hyperlinks are colored\\ +% screen & {\rmfamily see text} & A screen version: +% hyperlinks are colored\\ +% natbib & true & Whether to use the |natbib| package (see +% Section~\ref{sec:ug_bibliography})\\ +% anonymous & false & Whether to make author(s) anonymous\\ +% authorversion & false & Whether to generate a special +% version for the authors' personal use or posting (see +% Section~\ref{sec:ug_topmatter})\\ +% nonacm & false & Use the class typesetting options for +% a non-ACM document, which will not include the conference/journal +% header and footers. Currenly such documents allow only a +% Creative Commons license.\\ +% timestamp & false & Whether to put a time stamp in the +% footer of each page\\ +% authordraft & false & Whether author's-draft mode is enabled\\ +% acmthm & true & Whether to define theorem-like environments, see +% Section~\ref{sec:ug_theorems}\\ +% balance & true & Whether to balance the last page in two column +% mode\\ +% pbalance & false & Whether to balance the last page in two column +% mode using pbalance package\\ +% urlbreakonhyphens & true & Whether to break urls on hyphens\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% +% The option |language| is used to define the languages for the +% multi-language papers. It is discussed in +% Section~\ref{sec:ug_i13n}. +% +%\subsection{Top matter} +%\label{sec:ug_topmatter} +% +% A number of commands set up \emph{top matter} or (in +% computer science jargon) \emph{metadata} for an article. They +% establish the publication name, article title, authors, DOI and +% other data. Some of these commands, like \cs{title} and \cs{author}, +% should be put by the authors. Others, like \cs{acmVolume} and +% \cs{acmDOI}---by the editors. Below we describe these commands and +% mention who should issue them. These macros should be used +% \emph{before} the \cs{maketitle} command. Note that in previous +% versions of ACM classes some of these commands should be used before +% \cs{maketitle}, and some after it. Now they all must be used before +% \cs{maketitle}. +% +% +% This class internally loads the |amsart| class, so many top-matter +% commands are inherited from |amsart|~\cite{Downes04:amsart}. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmJournal}% +% The macro \cs{acmJournal}\marg{shortName} sets the name of the +% journal or transaction for journals and transactions. The argument +% is the short name of the publication \emph{in uppercase}, for +% example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmJournal{TOMS} +% \end{verbatim} +% The currently recognized journals are listed in +% Table~\ref{tab:pubs}. Note that conference proceedings published in +% \emph{book} form do not set this macro. +% +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmConference}% +% The macro +% \cs{acmConference}\oarg{short name}\marg{name}\marg{date}\marg{venue} is +% used for conference proceedings published in the book form. The +% arguments are the following: +% \begin{description} +% \item[short name:] the abbreviated name of the conference (optional). +% \item[name:] the name of the conference. +% \item[date:] the date(s) of the conference. +% \item[venue:] the place of the conference. +% \end{description} +% Examples: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmConference[TD'15]{Technical Data Conference}{November +% 12--16}{Dallas, TX, USA} +% \acmConference{SA'15 Art Papers}{November 02--06, 2015}{Kobe, Japan} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmBooktitle}% +% By default we assume that conference proceedings are published +% in the book named \emph{Proceedings of \textsc{CONFERENCE}}, where +% \textsc{CONFERENCE} is the name of the conference inferred from the +% command \cs{acmConference} above. However, sometimes the book title +% is different. The command \cs{acmBooktitle} can be used to set this +% title, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmBooktitle{Companion to the first International Conference on the +% Art, Science and Engineering of Programming (Programming '17)} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% An ACM paper should have either \cs{acmJournal} or +% \cs{acmConference} command. If it has both (or more) commands, the +% last one takes precedence. Note that if you have the command +% \cs{acmConference} in a journal format like |acmsmall|, the class +% will use conference format for bibstrip and reference citation +% formatting. In the samples directory there is a file +% |sample-acmsmall-conf.tex| with the example of this usage. +% +% An ACM Engage material should \emph{not} use \cs{acmJournal} or +% \cs{acmConference} command. It may use \cs{acmBooktitle} to +% override the default \emph{ACM EngageCSEdu}. It should use \cs{acmYear} +% to set the date of the material. +% +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\editor}% +% In most cases, conference proceedings are edited. You can use the +% command \cs{editor}\marg{editor} to set the editor of the volume. +% This command can be repeated, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \editor{Jennifer B. Sartor} +% \editor{Theo D'Hondt} +% \editor{Wolfgang De Meuter} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\title}% +% The command |\title|, as in the |amsart| class, has two arguments: one +% optional, and one mandatory: +% \begin{flushleft} +% |\title[|\meta{ShortTitle}|]{|\meta{FullTitle}|}| +% \end{flushleft} +% The mandatory argument is the full title of the article. The +% optional argument, if present, defines the shorter version of the +% title for running heads. If the optional argument is absent, the +% full title is used instead. +% +% It is expected that this command is inserted by the author of the +% manuscript. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\subtitle}% +% Besides title, ACM classes allow a subtitle, set with the +% \cs{subtitle}\marg{subtitle} macro. +% +% The commands for specifying authors are highly structured. +% The reason is they serve double duty: the authors' information is +% typeset in the manuscript \emph{and} is used by the metadata +% extraction tools for indexing and cataloguing. Therefore it is very +% important to follow the guidelines exactly. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\author}% +% \DescribeMacro{\orcid} +% \DescribeMacro{\affiliation}% +% \DescribeMacro{\email}% +% The basic commands are \cs{author}, \cs{orcid} (for the researchers +% registered with ORCID, \url{http://www.orcid.org/}), \cs{affiliation} and +% \cs{email}. In the simplest case, you enter them in this order: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \author{...} +% \orcid{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \email{...} +% \end{verbatim} +% Do \emph{not} use the \LaTeX\ \cs{and} macro or commas, or \verb|\\| +% between the authors! Each author deserves their +% own \cs{author} command. An attempt to list several authors or +% their e-mails in one command leads to a warning or an error. This +% is not a bug, but the expected behavior. +% +% Note that some formats do not typeset e-mails or ORCID identifiers. +% Do not worry: the metadata tools will get them. +% +% ACM strongly encourages that you include ORCIDs for all authors +% before compiling or submitting for review and/or production +% processing. +% +% If you do not have an ORCID, you may get one for free by +% registering at \url{http://www.orcid.org/}. +% +% +% Sometimes an author has several affiliations. In this case, the +% \cs{affiliation} command should be repeated: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \author{...} +% \orcid{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \email{...} +% \end{verbatim} +% Similarly you can repeat the \cs{email} command. +% +% You may have several authors with the same affiliation, different +% affiliations, or overlapping affiliations (author~$A_1$ is affiliated +% with institutions $I_1$ and $I_2$, while author $A_2$ is affiliated +% with $I_2$ only, author $A_3$ is affiliated with +% $I_1$ and $I_3$, etc.). The recommended solution is to put the +% \cs{affiliation} commands after each author, possibly repeating them: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \author{...} +% \orcid{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \email{...} +% \author{...} +% \orcid{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \email{...} +% \author{...} +% \orcid{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \email{...} +% \end{verbatim} +% In some cases, when several authors share the same affiliation, you can +% try to save space using the format +% \begin{verbatim} +% \author{...} +% \email{...} +% \author{...} +% \email{...} +% \affiliation{...} +% \end{verbatim} +% However, this format is not generally recommended. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\additionalaffiliation}% +% In some cases, too many affiliations can take too much space. The +% command \cs{additionalaffiliation}\marg{affiliation} creates a +% footnote after an author's name with the words ``Also with +% \marg{affiliation}''. You should use this command only as a last +% resort. An example of usage is: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \author{G. Tobin} +% \author{Ben Trovato} +% \additionalaffiliation{% +% \institution{The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group} +% \city{Hekla} +% \country{Iceland}} +% \affiliation{% +% \institution{Institute for Clarity in Documentation} +% \city{Dublin} +% \state{Ohio}} +% \end{verbatim} +% Here Trovato and Tobin share their affiliation with the Institute +% for Clarity in Documentation, but only Ben Trovato is affiliated +% with The Th{\o}rv{\"a}ld Group. +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\position}% +% \DescribeMacro{\institution}% +% \DescribeMacro{\department}% +% \DescribeMacro{\city}% +% \DescribeMacro{\state}% +% \DescribeMacro{\country}% +% The \cs{affiliation} and \cs{additionalaffiliation} commands are +% further structured to interact with the metadata extraction tools. +% Inside these commands you should use the \cs{position}, +% \cs{institution}, \cs{department}, \cs{city}, +% \cs{state}, and \cs{country} macros to indicate the +% corresponding parts of the affiliation. Note that in some cases +% (for example, journals) these parts are not printed in the resulting +% copy, but they \emph{are} necessary since they are used by the XML +% metadata extraction programs. Do \emph{not} put commas or |\\| +% between the elements of \cs{affiliation}. They will be provided +% automatically. +% +% The fields \cs{institution}, \cs{city} and \cs{country} are +% mandatory. If they are not provided, an error or a warning is +% issued. Currently the absence of \cs{country} produces an error; +% ACM may change this in the future. +% +% Starting 2024, ACM no longer collects or print postal addresses of +% the authors. Thus the commands \cs{streetaddress} and +% \cs{postcode}, present in the previous versions of the class, now +% produce a warining. +% +% +% An example of the author block: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \author{A. U. Thor} +% \orcid{1234-4564-1234-4565} +% \affiliation{% +% \institution{University of New South Wales} +% \department{School of Biomedical Engineering} +% \city{Sidney} +% \state{NSW} +% \country{Australia}} +% \email{author@nsw.au.edu} +% \author{A. N. Other} +% \affiliation{% +% \institution{University of New South Wales} +% \city{Sidney} +% \state{NSW} +% \country{Australia}} +% \author{C. O. Respondent} +% \orcid{1234-4565-4564-1234} +% \affiliation{% +% \institution{University of Pennsylvania} +% \city{Philadelphia} +% \state{PA} +% \country{USA}} +% \affiliation{% +% \institution{University of New South Wales} +% \city{Sidney} +% \state{NSW} +% \country{Australia}} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Note that the old ACM conference formats did not allow more than six +% authors and required some effort from authors to achieve +% alignment. The new format is much better in this. +% +% Sometimes an author works in several departments within the same +% insitution. There could be two situations: the departments are +% independent, or one department is within another. In the first +% case, just repeat the command \cs{department} several times. To +% handle the second case the command has an optional numerical +% parameter. The departments with higher numbers are higher in the +% organizational chart. Compare +% \begin{verbatim} +% \affiliation{% +% \department[0]{Department of Lunar Studies} % 0 is the default +% \department[1]{John Doe Institute} % higher than 0 +% \institution{University of San Serriffe} +% \country{San Serriffe}} +% \end{verbatim} +% and +% \begin{verbatim} +% \affiliation{% +% \department{Department of Lunar Studies} % Not in the John Doe Institute! +% \department{John Doe Institute} +% \institution{University of San Serriffe} +% \country{San Serriffe}} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\correspondingauthor}% +% The command \cs{correspondingauthor} after an author's name marks +% the corresponding author. Note that there could be more than one +% corresponding author. Make sure that you have the email of the +% author entered. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\thanks}% +% Like |amsart| (and unlike standard \LaTeX{}), we allow +% |\thanks| only \emph{outside} of the commands |\title| and |\author|. +% This command is obsolete and should \emph{not} be used in most +% cases. Do not list your acknowledgments or grant sponsors here. +% Put this information in the |acks| environment (see +% Section~\ref{sec:ug_acks}). +% +% \DescribeMacro{\authorsaddresses}% +% In some formats, addresses are printed as a footnote on the first +% page. By default \LaTeX\ typesets them itself using the information +% you give it. However, you can override its choice using the +% commmand \cs{authorsaddresses}\marg{contact addresses}, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \authorsaddresses{% +% Authors' addresses: G.~Zhou, Computer Science Department, College of +% William and Mary, 104 Jameson Rd, Williamsburg, PA 23185, US; +% V.~B\'eranger, Inria Paris-Rocquencourt, Rocquencourt, France; +% A.~Patel, Rajiv Gandhi University, Rono-Hills, Doimukh, Arunachal +% Pradesh, India; H.~Chan, Tsinghua University, 30 Shuangqing Rd, +% Haidian Qu, Beijing Shi, China; T.~Yan, Eaton Innovation Center, +% Prague, Czech Republic; T.~He, C.~Huang, J.~A.~Stankovic University +% of Virginia, School of Engineering Charlottesville, VA 22903, USA; +% T. F. Abdelzaher, (Current address) NASA Ames Research Center, +% Moffett Field, California 94035.} +% \end{verbatim} +% You can \emph{suppress} printing authors' addresses by setting them +% to an empty string: |\authorsaddresses{}|. Please note that +% authors' addresses are mandatory for journal articles. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\titlenote}% +% \DescribeMacro{\subtitlenote}% +% \DescribeMacro{\authornote}% +% While the command \cs{thanks} generates a note without a footnote +% mark, sometimes the authors might need notes more tightly connected +% to the title, subtitle or author. The commands \cs{titlenote}, +% \cs{subtitlenote} and \cs{authornote} that follow the corresponding +% commands (\cs{title}, \cs{subtitle} and \cs{author}) generate such +% notes. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \title{This is a title} +% \titlenote{This is a titlenote} +% \author{A. U. Thor} +% \authornote{This is an authornote} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Please never use a \cs{footnote} inside an \cs{author} or \cs{title} +% command since this confuses the metadata extraction software. (Actually +% these commands now produce errors.) +% +% \DescribeMacro{\authornotemark}% +% Sometimes one may need to have the same footnote connected to +% several authors. The command \cs{authornotemark}\oarg{number} adds +% just the footnote mark, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \author{A. U. Thor} +% \authornote{Both authors contributed equally to the paper} +% ... +% \author{A. N. Other} +% \authornotemark[1] +% \end{verbatim} +% The correct numbering of these marks is the responsibility of the +% user. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmVolume}% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmNumber}% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmArticle}% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmYear}% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmMonth}% +% The macros \cs{acmVolume}, \cs{acmNumber}, \cs{acmArticle}, +% \cs{acmYear} and \cs{acmMonth} are inserted by the editor and set +% the journal volume, issue, article number, year and month +% corrspondingly. The arguments of all these commands, including +% \cs{acmMonth}, is numerical. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmVolume{9} +% \acmNumber{4} +% \acmArticle{39} +% \acmYear{2010} +% \acmMonth{3} +% \end{verbatim} +% Note that \cs{acmArticle} is used not only for journals but also +% for some conference proceedings. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmArticleSeq}% +% The articles in the same issue of a journal have a \emph{sequence +% number}. By default it is the same as the article number, +% but the command \cs{acmArticleSeq}\marg{n} can be used to change it: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmArticle{39} % The sequence number will be 39 by default +% \acmArticleSeq{5} % We redefine it to 5 +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmSubmissionID}% +% If your paper got a Submission~ID from the Conference Management +% System, put it here: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmSubmissionID{123-A56-BU3} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmISBN}% +% Book-like volumes have ISBN numbers attached to them. The macro +% \cs{acmISBN}\marg{ISBN} sets it. Normally it is set by the +% typesetter, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmISBN{978-1-4503-3916-2} +% \end{verbatim} +% Setting it to the empty string, as |\acmISBN{}|, suppresses printing the +% ISBN. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmDOI}% +% The macro \cs{acmDOI}\marg{DOI} sets the DOI of the article, for +% example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmDOI{10.1145/9999997.9999999} +% \end{verbatim} +% It is normally set by the typesetter. Setting it to the empty +% string, as |\acmDOI{}|, suppresses the DOI. +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmBadge}% +% Some conference articles get special distinctions, for example, the +% artifact evaluation for PPoPP~2016 +% (see~\url{http://ctuning.org/ae/ppopp2016.html}). These articles +% display special badges supplied by the conference organizers. This +% class provides command to add these badges: +% \cs{acmBadge}\oarg{url}\marg{graphics}. +% The arguments have the following meaning: \oarg{url}, if provided, +% sets the link to the badge authority in the screen version, while +% \marg{graphics} sets the graphics file with the badge image. The +% file must be a cropped square, which is scaled to a standard size in +% the output. For example, if the badge image is |ae-logo.pdf|, the +% command is +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmBadge[http://ctuning.org/ae/ppopp2016.html]{ae-logo} +% \end{verbatim} +% The command can be repeated, if a paper has several badges. +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\startPage}% +% The macro \cs{startPage}\marg{page} sets the first page of the +% article in a journal or book. It is used by the typesetter. +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\keywords}% +% The command +% \cs{keywords}\marg{keyword, keyword,\ldots} sets keywords for the +% publication. If present, keywords must be +% separated by commas, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \keywords{wireless sensor networks, media access control, +% multi-channel, radio interference, time synchronization} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \DescribeEnv{CCSXML}% +% \DescribeMacro{\ccsdesc}% +% ACM publications are classified according to the ACM Computing +% Classification Scheme (CCS). CCS codes are used both in the typeset +% version of the publications \emph{and} in the metadata in various +% databases. Therefore you need to provide both \TeX\ commands and XML +% metadata with the paper. +% +% The tool at \url{http://dl.acm.org/ccs.cfm} can be used to generate +% CCS codes. After you select the topics, click on ``Generate CCS +% codes'' to get results like the following: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{CCSXML} +% +% +% 10010520.10010553.10010562 +% Computer systems organization~Embedded systems +% 500 +% +% +% 10010520.10010575.10010755 +% Computer systems organization~Redundancy +% 300 +% +% +% 10010520.10010553.10010554 +% Computer systems organization~Robotics +% 100 +% +% +% 10003033.10003083.10003095 +% Networks~Network reliability +% 100 +% +% +% \end{CCSXML} +% +% \ccsdesc[500]{Computer systems organization~Embedded systems} +% \ccsdesc[300]{Computer systems organization~Redundancy} +% \ccsdesc{Computer systems organization~Robotics} +% \ccsdesc[100]{Networks~Network reliability} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% You just need to copy this code and paste it in your paper anywhere +% before \verb|\maketitle|. +% +% CCS Concepts and user-defined keywords are required for all articles +% over two pages in length, and are optional for one- and two-page +% articles (or abstracts). +% +% \DescribeMacro{\setcopyright} +% There are several possibilities for the copyright of the papers +% published by the ACM: the authors may license the paper +% to the ACM, some or all authors might be employees of the +% US or Canadian governments, etc. Accordingly the command +% \verb|\setcopyright{...}| is introduced. Its argument is the +% copyright status of the paper, for example, +% \verb|\setcopyright{acmcopyright}|. The possible values for this +% command are listed in Table~\ref{tab:setcopyright}. This command +% must be placed in the preamble, before |\begin{document}|. +% +% \begin{table} +% \centering +% \caption{Parameters for the \texttt{\textbackslash setcopyright} command} +% \label{tab:setcopyright} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{lX} +% \toprule +% Parameter & Meaning\\ +% \midrule +% \texttt{none} & The copyright and permission information is not +% typeset. (This is the option for some ACM conferences.) \\ +% \texttt{acmlicensed} & The authors retain the copyright but +% license the publication rights to ACM\@. \\ +% \texttt{rightsretained} & The authors retain the copyright and +% publication rights to themselves or somebody else. \\ +% \texttt{usgov} & All the authors are employees of the US +% government. \\ +% \texttt{usgovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the US +% government. \\ +% \texttt{cagov} & All the authors are employees of the Canadian +% government. \\ +% \texttt{cagovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the Canadian +% government. \\ +% \texttt{licensedusgovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the US +% government, and the publication rights are licensed to ACM\@. \\ +% \texttt{licensedcagov} & All the authors are employees of the Canadian +% government, and the publication rights are licensed to ACM\@. \\ +% \texttt{licensedcagovmixed} & Some authors are employees of the +% Canadian +% government, and the publication rights are licensed to ACM\@. \\ +% \texttt{othergov} & Authors are employees of a +% government other than the US or Canada. \\ +% \texttt{licensedothergov} & Authors are employees of a +% government other than the US or Canada, and the publication rights +% are licensed to ACM\@. \\ +% \texttt{iw3c2w3} & Special statement for conferences organized +% by IW3C2.\\ +% \texttt{iw3c2w3g} & Special statement for conferences organized +% by IW3C2, when some authors are approved Google employees.\\ +% \texttt{cc} & Creative Commons license. If this key is set, +% \textsl{doclicense} images are used to typeset the license. See +% also \cs{setcctype} command. \\ +% \texttt{acmcopyright} & The authors transfer the copyright to the +% ACM. This choice is no longer available for the +% non-commissioned authors and will trigger a warning.\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\setcctype}% +% If Creative Commons license is used, the package by default chooses +% CC-BY 4.0 Attribution 4.0 International license. You can override +% this choice by the command \cs{setcctype}\oarg{version}\marg{type}, +% where \oarg{version} can be either 3.0 or 4.0 (4.0 by default), and +% \marg{type} can be one of |zero|, |by|, |by-sa|, |by-nd|, +% |by-nc|, |by-nc-sa|, |by-nc-nd| (see +% \url{https://creativecommons.org/licenses/} for the explanation). +% This command should be used in the preamble only. +% +% Material published under Creative Commons license should include +% the corresponding icon. A modern \TeX\ distribution includes these +% icons in the package \textsl{doclicense}. In case your distribution +% does not have them, ACM provides a file \path{ccicons.zip} with +% these icons. Just unzip it in the same directory where your +% document is. +% +% The ACM submission software should generate the right command for you +% to paste into your file. +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\copyrightyear}% +% Each copyright statement must have the year of copyright. By +% default it is the same as \cs{acmYear}, but you can override this +% using the macro \cs{copyrightyear}, e.g., +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmYear{2016} +% \copyrightyear{2015} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% There is a special case for a personal copy that the authors may be +% allowed to generate for their use or a posting on a personal site +% (check the instructions for the specific journal or conference for +% the details). The document option |authorversion=true| produces a +% special form of the copyright statement for this case. Note that +% you still need the \cs{setcopyright} command and (optionally) +% \cs{copyrightyear} command to tell \TeX\ about the copyright owner and +% year. Also, you should be aware that due to the different sizes of +% the permssion blocks for the printed version and authors' version, +% the page breaks might be different between them. +% +% \DescribeEnv{abstract}% +% The environment |abstract| must \emph{precede} the \cs{maketitle} +% command. Again, this is different from the standard \LaTeX. +% Putting |abstract| after \cs{maketitle} will trigger an error. +% +% +% \DescribeEnv{teaserfigure}% +% A special kind of figure is used for many two-column conference +% proceedings. This figure is placed just after the authors but +% before the main text. The environment |teaserfigure| is used for these +% figures. This environment must be used \emph{before} +% \cs{maketitle}, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{teaserfigure} +% \includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{sampleteaser} +% \caption{This is a teaser} +% \label{fig:teaser} +% \end{teaserfigure} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\settopmatter}% +% Some information in the top matter is printed for certain journals +% or proceedings and suppressed for others. You can override these +% defaults using the command \cs{settopmatter}\marg{settings}. The +% settings and their meanings are listed in +% Table~\ref{tab:settopmatter}. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \settopmatter{printacmref=false, printccs=true, printfolios=true} +% \end{verbatim} +% The parameter |authorsperrow| requires some explanation. In +% conference proceedings authors' information is typeset in boxes, +% several boxes per row (see |sample-sigconf.pdf|, +% |sample-sigplan.pdf|, etc.). The number of boxes per row is +% determined automatically. If you want to override this, +% you can do it using this parameter, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \settopmatter{authorsperrow=4} +% \end{verbatim} +% However, in most cases you should \emph{not} do this and should use the +% default settings. Setting |authorsperrow| to $0$ will revert it to the +% default settings. +% +% The parameter |printacmref| specifies whether to print the ACM +% bibliographic entry (default), or not. Note that this entry is +% required for all articles over one page in length, and is optional +% for one-page articles (abstracts). +% +% \begin{table} +% \centering +% \caption{Settings for the \cs{settopmatter} command} +% \label{tab:settopmatter} +% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{llX} +% \toprule +% Parameter & Values & Meaning\\ +% \midrule +% |printccs| & true/false & Whether to print CCS categories\\ +% |printacmref| & true/false & Whether to print the ACM bibliographic +% entry\\ +% |printfolios| & true/false & Whether to print page numbers +% (folios)\\ +% |authorsperrow| & numeric & Number of authors per row for the title +% page in +% conference proceedings formats\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabularx} +% \end{table} +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\received}% +% The command \cs{received}\oarg{stage}\marg{date} sets the history of +% the publication. The~\oarg{stage} argument is optional; the default +% is |Received| for the first date and |revised| for the subsequent +% ones. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \received{20 February 2007} +% \received[revised]{12 March 2009} +% \received[accepted]{5 June 2009} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\maketitle}% +% The macro \cs{maketitle} must be the last command in the top-matter +% group. That is it must follow the commands defined in this section. +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\shortauthors}% +% \emph{After} the command \cs{maketitle}, the macro \cs{shortauthors} +% stores the names of the authors for the running head. You can +% redefine it if the list of author's name is too long, e.g., +% \begin{verbatim} +% \maketitle +% \renewcommand{\shortauthors}{Zhou et al.} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +%\subsection{Top matter of ACM Engage materials} +%\label{sec:ug_engage} +% +% ACM Engage materials resemble conference proceedings, but have some +% special features. First, as a rule, they are released under a +% Creative Commons license. By default CC-BY is used. However, if +% you want to use another variant of CC license, use \cs{setcctype} +% command, for example, |\setcctype{by-nc}|. Second, abstract is +% called \emph{synopsis}. Third, there are special top matter items +% used for the materials, such as \emph{Course,} \emph{Resource Type,} +% \emph{Programming Language,} \emph{CS Topics}. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\setengagemetadata}% +% These items are set with the command +% \cs{setengagemetadata}\marg{name}\marg{value}, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \setengagemetadata{Course}{CS1} +% \setengagemetadata{Programming Language}{Python} +% \setengagemetadata{Knowledge Unit}{Programming Concepts} +% \setengagemetadata{CS Topics}{Functions, Data Types, Expressions, +% Mathematical Reasoning} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Note that the type of Creative Commons license, if such license is +% used, is automatically added to the metadata. +% +% +%\subsection{ACM cover page} +%\label{sec:ug_acmcp} +% +% ACM cover pages are forms of extended abstracts that are added to +% journals at the late stage. Authors prepare them as separate +% \texttt{.tex} files using |acmcp| format. At present only JDS uses +% them, but in the future this may change. +% +% There are several top matter commands specific for this format. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmArticleType}% +% There are five article types accepted by JDS: \emph{Research} (the +% default), \emph{Review}, \emph{Discussion}, \emph{Invited}, and +% \emph{Position}. The command \cs{acmArticleType}\marg{type} sets the +% article type, for example +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmArticleType{Review} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmCodeLink}% +% \DescribeMacro{\acmDataLink}% +% The commands \cs{acmCodeDataLink}\marg{link} and +% \cs{acmDataLink}\marg{link} set the links to the data and code +% accompanying the paper, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmCodeLink{https://github.com/repository/code} +% \acmDataLink{https://datadryad.org/stash/dataset/doi:DOI} +% \end{verbatim} +% You may repeat these commands if you have several repositories. +% +% +% \cs{acmContributions}% +% The command \cs{acmContributions}\marg{contributions} sets the +% contributions of the authors, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \acmContributions{AW designed the study, CD performed it, all +% authors contributed to the writing.} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% ACM cover page should have the following obligatory sections: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item Problem statement, +% \item Methods, +% \item Results, +% \item Significance. +% \end{itemize} +% +% Sometimes the addresses extracted from the authors' data are too +% long to fit on the page. In this case the command +% \cs{authorsaddresses} can be use to override them, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \authorsaddresses{Corresponding author: Ben Trovato, +% \href{mailto:trovato@corporation.com}{trovato@corporation.com}; +% Institute for Clarity in Documentation, P.O. Box 1212, Dublin, +% Ohio, USA, 43017-6221} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% The design of the cover page may require additional runs of latex to +% make the elements of the page align. +% +%\subsection{Internationalization} +%\label{sec:ug_i13n} +% +% ACM accepts publications in languages other than English, as well as +% papers in English with translations of titles, subtitles, keywords +% and abstracts into other languages. Papers in languages other than +% English usually have titles, subtitles (if applicable), keywords and +% abstracts in English. Note that CCS concepts are always typeset in +% English. +% +% To submit these papers you need to set the option |language| in the +% \cs{documentclass} command. This option can be repeated, for +% example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[sigconf, language=french, language=english]{acmart} +% \end{verbatim} +% The last language in the list is the main language of the paper, +% i.e. the one for the main title, abstract, body, etc. The other +% languages are \emph{secondary,} and used for translated titles, +% keywords, abstracts. Thus the paper above is written in English, +% and has a secondary abstract and a secondary title in French. On +% the other hand, a paper in French with secondary titles and abstracts +% in English and German should use, for example +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[sigconf, +% language=german, +% language=english, +% language=french]{acmart} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% This key can use any language defined in \textsl{babel} +% package~\cite{Braams22:Babel} (currently the package is tested with +% English, French, German and Spanish languages. If \cs{keywords} are +% used, then other languages may +% require a translation of \cs{keywordsname} macro). Actually +% \textsl{acmart} loads \textsl{babel} internally, so you can use the +% facilities provided by this package. +% +% +% If this key is set, you have access to several additional top matter +% commands. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\translatedtitle}% +% \DescribeMacro{\translatedsubtitle}% +% \DescribeMacro{\translatedkeywords}% +% The commands \cs{translatedtitle}, +% \cs{translatedsubtitle}, and (if keywords are used) +% \cs{translatedkeywords} have two mandatory arguments each: +% \marg{language} and \marg{keywords}. They are used to set title, +% subtitle and keywords in the secondary language. For example, a +% paper in English with French title and abstract may set +% \begin{verbatim} +% \title{A note on computational complexity} +% \translatedtitle{french}{Remarque sur la complexit\'e de calcul} +% \end{verbatim} +% while a paper in French should set +% \begin{verbatim} +% \title{Remarque sur la complexit\'e de calcul} +% \translatedtitle{english}{A note on computational complexity} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \DescribeEnv{translatedabstract}% +% Similarly, |translatedabstract| environment has a mandatory language +% argument, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{translatedastract}{english} +% This is the English version of the abstract +% \end{translatedastract} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% You can repeat these commands if a paper has more than one secondary +% language. +% +% Use the standard commands (\cs{title}, \cs{subtitle}, +% \cs{keywords}, |abstract|) for the main language of the paper. +% +% +%\subsection{Tagging} +%\label{sec:ug-tagging} +% +% +% ACM is firmly committed to produce fully tagged PDFs compliant with +% the accessibility standards. +% +% The \LaTeX\ tagging project, +% \url{https://latex3.github.io/tagging-project/} is aimed to create +% accessible and standards compliant PDFs. To create a tagged PDF, +% start your document with the \cs{DocumentMetadata} command, for +% example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \DocumentMetadata{ +% lang = en, +% pdfstandard = ua-2, +% pdfstandard = a-4f, +% tagging=on, +% tagging-setup={math/setup=mathml-SE} +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% You must use \texttt{lualatex} to make the document fully tagged. +% For some features you may need \texttt{lualatex-dev}. +% +% +% +% At present this code is still experimental. If you use it, please +% \emph{do not ask ACM for support}. On the other hand, bug reports +% at \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues} will be +% appreciated. +% +% +%\subsection{Algorithms} +%\label{sec:ug_algorithms} +% +% There are now several good packages for typesetting +% algorithms~\cite{Fiorio15, Brito09, Heinz15}, and the authors are +% free to choose their favorite one. +% +% +% +%\subsection{Figures and tables} +%\label{sec:ug_floats} +% +% ACM styles use the standard \LaTeX\ interface for figures and +% tables. There are some important items to be aware of, however. +% +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item The captions for figures must be entered \emph{after} the +% figure bodies and for tables \emph{before} the table bodies. +% \item The ACM uses the standard types for figures and tables and adds +% several new ones. In total there are the following types: +% \begin{description} +% \item[figure, table:] a standard figure or table taking a full text +% width in one-column formats and one column width in two-column formats. +% \item[figure*, table*] in two-column formats, a special figure or +% table taking a full text width. +% \item[teaserfigure:] a special figure before \cs{maketitle}. +% \end{description} +% +% \item Accordingly, when scaling images, one should use the +% following sizes: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item For |teaserfigure|, |figure| in one-column mode or |figure*| in +% two-column mode, use \cs{textwidth}. In one-column mode, you can also +% use \cs{columnwidth}, which coincides with \cs{textwidth} in this +% case. +% \item For |figure| in two-column mode, use \cs{columnwidth}. +% \end{enumerate} +% +% \end{enumerate} +% +% It is strongly recommended to use the package |booktabs|~\cite{Fear05} +% and follow its main principles of typography with respect to tables: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item Never, ever use vertical rules. +% \item Never use double rules. +% \end{enumerate} +% It is also a good idea not to overuse horizontal rules. +% +% For table \emph{footnotes} you have several options described in the TeX +% FAQ~\cite{TeXFAQ}. The simplest one is to use a \cs{minipage} +% environment: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{table} +% \caption{Simulation Configuration} +% \label{tab:conf} +% \begin{minipage}{\columnwidth} +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{ll} +% \toprule +% TERRAIN\footnote{This is a table footnote. This is a +% table footnote. This is a table footnote.} & +% (200\,m$\times$200\,m) Square\\ +% Node Number & 289\\ +% Node Placement & Uniform\\ +% Application & Many-to-Many/Gossip CBR Streams\\ +% Payload Size & 32 bytes\\ +% Routing Layer & GF\\ +% MAC Layer & CSMA/MMSN\\ +% Radio Layer & RADIO-ACCNOISE\\ +% Radio Bandwidth & 250Kbps\\ +% Radio Range & 20m--45m\\ +% \bottomrule +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% \bigskip +% \footnotesize\emph{Source:} This is a table +% sourcenote. This is a table sourcenote. This is a table +% sourcenote. +% +% \emph{Note:} This is a table footnote. +% \end{minipage} +% \end{table} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% Tables and figures are by default centered. However, in some cases +% (for example, when you use several subimages per figure) you may +% need to override this. A good way to do so is to put the contents +% into a \cs{minipage} of the width \cs{columnwidth}. +% +% If tagging is enabled (see Section~\ref{sec:ug-tagging}), it assumes +% that the first row of table contains headers. To change this +% assumption, use \c{tagpdfsetup}, for example, if you have two rows +% of headers, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \tagpdfsetup{table/header-rows={1,2}} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +%\subsection{Descriptions of images} +%\label{sec:descriptions} +% +% Some readers of ACM publications might be visually challenged. +% These readers might use a voice-over software to read aloud the +% papers. It is important to provide them a description of each +% image used in the paper. +% +% There are two ways to include descriptions in the figures. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\Description}% +% The old way, that predates \LaTeX\ tagging project is based on the +% \cs{Description} command. +% The command \cs{Description}\oarg{short description}\marg{long +% description} should be placed inside every \texttt{figure}, +% \texttt{teaserfigure} or \texttt{marginfigure} environment to +% provide a description of the image(s) used in the figure. Unlike +% \cs{caption}, which is used alongside the image, \cs{Description} is +% intended to be used instead of the image, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{figure} +% \centering +% \includegraphics{voltage} +% \Description{A bell-like histogram centered at $0.5$~V with most +% measurements between $0.2$~V and $0.8$~V} +% \caption{Histogram of the measurements of voltage} +% \label{fig:voltage} +% \end{figure} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% The new way, which is switched on by the \cs{DocumentMetada} command +% is based on the |alt| keyword for the \cs{includegraphics} command, +% for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{figure} +% \centering +% \includegraphics[alt={A bell-like histogram +% centered at $0.5$~V with most +% measurements between $0.2$~V and $0.8$~V}]{voltage} +% \caption{Histogram of the measurements of voltage} +% \label{fig:voltage} +% \end{figure} +% \end{verbatim} +% At present the lack of descriptions generates a warning at +% compilation. +% +%\subsection{Theorems} +%\label{sec:ug_theorems} +% +% The ACM classes define two theorem styles and several pre-defined +% theorem environments: +% \begin{description} +% \item[acmplain:] this is the style used for +% |theorem|, +% |conjecture|, +% |proposition|, +% |lemma| and +% |corollary|, and +% \item[acmdefinition:] this is the style used for +% |example| and +% |definition|. +% \end{description} +% +% +% These environments are defined by default. In the unusual +% circumstance that a user does not wish to have these environments +% defined, the option |acmthm=false| in the preamble will suppress +% them. +% +% Sometimes authors want to define new theorem-like constructs that +% use |theorem| counters. These constructs must be defined either after +% |\begin{document}|, or delayed using \cs{AtEndPreamble} macro, +% for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \AtEndPreamble{% +% \theoremstyle{acmdefinition} +% \newtheorem{remark}[theorem]{Remark}} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% If you use \textsl{cleveref} and share counters between the +% theorem-like constructs, you need to explicitly tell +% \textsl{cleveref} the kind of the construct you use, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] +% \newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} +% % Theorems and lemmas share counters +% ... +% \begin{theorem}\label{thm:test} % This is a theorem +% ... +% \begin{lemma}\label[lemma]{test-lemma} % This is a lemma +% \end{verbatim} +% +%\subsection{Online-only and offline-only material} +%\label{sec:ug_screen} +% +% \DescribeEnv{printonly}% +% \DescribeEnv{screenonly}% +% Some supplementary material in ACM publications is put online but +% not in the printed version. The text inside the environment +% |screenonly| will be typeset only when the option |screen| (see +% Section~\ref{sec:invocation}) is set to |true|. Conversely, the +% text inside the environment |printonly| is typeset only when this +% option is set to |false|. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \section{Supplementary materials} +% +% \begin{printonly} +% Supplementary materials are available in the online version of this paper. +% \end{printonly} +% +% \begin{screenonly} +% (The actual supplementary materials.) +% \end{screenonly} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% We use the |comment| package for typesetting this code, so +% |\begin| and |\end| should start on a line of their own with +% no leading or trailing spaces. +% +%\subsection{Note about anonymous mode} +%\label{sec:ug_anonymous} +% +% \DescribeEnv{anonsuppress}% +% When the option |anonymous| is selected, \TeX\ suppresses author +% information (including the number of authors) for an anonymous review. +% However, sometimes the information identifying the authors may be +% present in the body of the paper. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{anonsuppress} +% This is the continuation of the previous work by the author +% \cite{prev1, prev2}. +% \end{anonsuppress} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% As for the |printonly| and |screenonly| environments, +% |\begin{anonsuppress}| and |\end{anonsuppress}| should start on a +% line of their own with no leading or trailing spaces. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\anon}% +% To suppress short snippets of information, use the command +% \cs{anon}\oarg{substitute}\marg{suppressed-text}. By default +% \oarg{substitute} is the word ANONYMOUS. Examples: +% \begin{verbatim} +% This work was performed at \anon{NSA}. +% This work was performed at \anon[No Such Agency]{NSA}. +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +%\subsection{Acknowledgments} +%\label{sec:ug_acks} +% +% The traditional ``Acknowledgments'' section is conventionally used +% to thank persons and granting agencies for their help and support. +% However, there are several important considerations about this +% section. +% +% First, in anonymous mode this section must be omitted: it gives +% too much information to reviewers. Second, data about +% grants is extracted and stored separately by the postprocessing +% software. ACM classes provide facilities for both these tasks. +% +% \DescribeEnv{acks}% +% The environment |acks| starts an unnumbered section +% ``Acknowledgments'' unless the anonymous mode is chosen. Put all +% thanks inside this environment. +% +% As for the |printonly| and |screenonly| environments, +% |\begin{acks}| and |\end{acks}| should start on a +% line of their own with no leading or trailing spaces or comments. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\grantsponsor}% +% \DescribeMacro{\grantnum}% +% All financial support \emph{must} be listed using the commands +% \cs{grantsponsor} and \cs{grantnum}. These commands tell the +% postprocessing software about the granting organization and +% grant. The format of these commands is the following: +% \begin{quote} +% \cs{grantsponsor}\marg{sponsorID}\marg{name}\marg{url}\\ +% \cs{grantnum}\oarg{url}\marg{sponsorID}\marg{number}. +% \end{quote} +% Here \marg{sponsorID} is the unique ID used to match grants to +% sponsors, \marg{name} is the name of the sponsor, \marg{url} is its +% URL, and \marg{number} is the grant number. The \marg{sponsorID} of +% the \cs{grantnum} command must correspond to the \marg{sponsorID} of a +% \cs{grantsponsor} command. Some awards have their own web pages, +% which you can include using the optional argument of the \cs{grantnum} +% command. +% +% At present \marg{sponsorID} is chosen by the authors and can be an +% arbitrary key in the same way the label of a \cs{cite} is arbitrarily +% chosen. There might be a change to this policy if the ACM decides to +% create a global database of sponsoring organizations. +% +% Example: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{acks} +% The authors would like to thank Dr. Yuhua Li for providing the +% matlab code of the \textit{BEPS} method. +% +% The authors would also like to thank the anonymous referees for +% their valuable comments and helpful suggestions. This work is +% supported by the \grantsponsor{my-grant-GS501100001809}{National Natural +% Science Foundation of +% China}{https://doi.org/10.13039/501100001809} under Grant +% No.:~\grantnum{GS501100001809}{61273304} +% and~\grantnum[http://www.nnsf.cn/youngscientists]{GS501100001809}{Young +% Scientists' Support Program}. +% \end{acks} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +%\subsection{Bibliography} +%\label{sec:ug_bibliography} +% +% The ACM lets you use either Bib\TeX\ or Bib\LaTeX\ to process your references: +% they require slightly different setup of your \LaTeX\ file, as detailed in +% the following subsections. +%\subsubsection{Processing using Bib\TeX} +% This uses the |natbib| package for formatting references and +% the Bib\TeX\ style file \path{ACM-Reference-Format.bst} for Bib\TeX\ +% processing. You can disable loading of |natbib| using the +% option |natbib=false| in \cs{documentclass}. However, it is not +% recommended, as well as the use of Bib\TeX\ styles other than +% \path{ACM-Reference-Format.bst}, and may delay the processing of the +% manuscript. +% +% +% \DescribeMacro{\citestyle}% +% If you use |natbib|, you can select one of two predefined citation +% styles using the command \cs{citestyle}: the author-year format +% |acmauthoryear| or the numeric format |acmnumeric|. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \citestyle{acmauthoryear} +% \end{verbatim} +% Note that numeric citations are the default mode for most formats. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\setcitestyle}% +% You can further customize |natbib| using +% the \cs{setcitestyle} command, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \setcitestyle{numbers,sort&compress} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% One of the more common versions is +% \begin{verbatim} +% \setcitestyle{nosort} +% \end{verbatim} +% It is useful if you do not like the way |natbib| sorts citation +% lists. +% +% If you use |natbib|, then commands like \cs{citep} and +% \cs{citeauthor} are automatically supported. The command +% \cs{shortcite} is the same as \cs{cite} in numerical mode and cites +% the year in author-date mode. +% +% Note that before version~1.48 the command \cs{citeyear} put the year +% in parentheses. In version~1.48 and later it produces just the +% year; the command \cs{citeyearpar} can be used to emulate its old +% behavior. You can use these commands to produce in-text citations, +% for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% So we see that \citeauthor{Burano2026} +% proved this conjecture in \citeyear{Burano2026}~\cite{Burano2026}. +% \end{verbatim} +% +% There are several customized \BibTeX\ entry types and fields in the ACM +% style file \path{ACM-Reference-Format.bst} that you may want to be +% aware of. You can find many examples on the Web page +% \url{https://www.acm.org/publications/authors/bibtex-formatting}. +% +% +%\subsubsection{URL, DOI, eprint} +% +% +% +% The style supports the fields \path{doi} and \path{url}, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% doi = "10.1145/1188913.1188915", +% url = "http://ccrma.stanford.edu/~jos/bayes/bayes.pdf", +% \end{verbatim} +% Normally the printing of URL is suppressed if DOI is present. +% However, there is a special field \path{distinctURL}. If it is +% present and has any value, URL is printed even if DOI is present, +% for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% distinctURL = 'true', +% \end{verbatim} +% +% The dynamic nature of Internet makes URLs not permanent: sometimes +% they disappear or change. The problem of ``stale links'' exists +% from the early days of WWW. That is why ACM prefers DOIs to URLs: +% unlike the latter, the former are supposed to work forever. +% However, if you really need to use URLs, there are two facilities +% that help to mitigate some problems with the URLs. The field +% \path{lastaccessed} gives the date when the given URL was visited +% and had the information you saw. Presumably, some service like +% Internet Wayback Machine (\url{https://web.archive.org/}) allows the +% reader to retrieve this link at the given date. Moreover, sometimes +% a page is explicitly archived by this or other service. In this +% case the field \path{archived} will give the reference ot the +% archival version. Examples: +% \begin{verbatim} +% lastaccessed = {March 2, 2005}, +% archived = {https://web.archive.org/web/20240505055615} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% The style supports the arXiv-recommended fields \path{eprint} and +% (optionally) \path{primaryclass}, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% eprint = "960935712", +% primaryclass = "cs", +% \end{verbatim} + +%\subsubsection{Special entry types} +%\label{sec:preprints} +% +% +% +% +% +% There are several special entry types. Types \path{online} and +% \path{game} are used for Web pages and games, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% @online{Thornburg01, +% author = "Harry Thornburg", +% year = "2001", +% title = "Introduction to Bayesian Statistics", +% url = "http://ccrma.stanford.edu/~jos/bayes/bayes.html", +% month = mar, +% lastaccessed = "March 2, 2005", +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% Entry types \path{artifactsoftware}, \path{artifactdataset} +% (with synonyms \path{software} and \path{dataset}) can be used to +% cite software artifacts and datasets, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% @ArtifactSoftware{R, +% title = {R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing}, +% author = {{R Core Team}}, +% organization = {R Foundation for Statistical Computing}, +% address = {Vienna, Austria}, +% year = {2019}, +% url = {https://www.R-project.org/}, +%} +% @ArtifactDataset{UMassCitations, +% author = {Sam Anzaroot and Andrew McCallum}, +% title = {{UMass} Citation Field Extraction Dataset}, +% year = 2013, +% url = +% {http://www.iesl.cs.umass.edu/data/data-umasscitationfield}, +% lastaccessed = {May 27, 2019} +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% For these entry types you can use the \path{lastaccessed} field to add +% the access date for the URL and \path{archived} field to add the +% archival link. +% +% +% +% There are two ways to enter video or audio sources in the +% bibliograpy corresponding to two different possibilies. For +% standalone sources available online, you can use an \path{online} +% entry and set its \path{howpublished} field. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% @online{Obama08, +% author = "Barack Obama", +% year = "2008", +% title = "A more perfect union", +% howpublished = "Video", +% day = "5", +% url = "http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=6528042696351994555", +% month = mar, +% lastaccessed = "March 21, 2008", +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% For sources available as supplemental material attached to +% conference proceedings and similar documents, you can use the usual +% \path{inproceedings} entry type and set its \path{howpublished} +% field: +% \begin{verbatim} +% @Inproceedings{Novak03, +% author = "Dave Novak", +% title = "Solder man", +% booktitle = "ACM SIGGRAPH 2003 Video Review on Animation theater Program", +% year = "2003", +% publisher = "ACM Press", +% address = "New York, NY", +% pages = "4", +% month = "March 21, 2008", +% doi = "10.9999/woot07-S422", +% howpublished = "Video", +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Sometimes you need to cite a complete issue of a journal. The +% \path{periodical} entry type is intended for this: +% \begin{verbatim} +% @periodical{JCohen96, +% key = "Cohen", +% editor = "Jacques Cohen", +% title = "Special issue: Digital Libraries", +% journal = "Communications of the {ACM}", +% volume = "39", +% number = "11", +% month = nov, +% year = "1996", +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Sometimes a work is presented at meeting, but is not (yet) +% published in the proceedings. The entry type \path{presentation} is +% used for this purpose. The field \path{venue} is used for the place +% of the meeting: +% \begin{verbatim} +% @Presentation{Reiser2014, +% author = {Brian J. Reiser}, +% year = 2014, +% title = {Designing coherent storylines aligned with NGSS for the +% K-12 classroom}, +% venue = {National Science Education Leadership Association +% Meeting, Boston, MA, USA}, +% url = {https://www.academia.edu/6884962/} +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% The URL, if present, may be accompanied by \path{lastaccessed} and +% \path{archived} links. +% +% A preprint can be cited using the entry +% \path{preprint}, for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% @preprint{AnzarootPBM14, +% author = {Sam Anzaroot and +% Alexandre Passos and +% David Belanger and +% Andrew McCallum}, +% title = {Learning Soft Linear Constraints with Application to +% Citation Field Extraction}, +% year = {2014}, +% archivePrefix = {arXiv}, +% eprint = {1403.1349}, +% doi = {10.48550/arXiv.1403.1349} +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Sometimes you need to cite an article under review. ACM prefers the +% authors to use preprints for this purpose, but sometimes it is not +% feasible. In this case you can use the entry \path{underreview}, +% for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% @underreview{Baggett2025, +% author = {R. Baggett and M. Simecek and C. Chambellan +% and K. Tsui and M. Fraune}, +% year = 2025, +% title = {Fluidity in the Phased Framework of Technology +% Acceptance: Case Study to Gain a Holistic Understanding +% of (Older Adult) Participant Advancement Through +% Acceptance Phases with Mobile Telepresence Robots}, +% journal = {Robotics Aut. Systems} +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +%\subsubsection{Dates and sorting} +% +% +% If you do not know the year of publication, the style will add +% ``[n.\,d.]'' (for ``no date'') to the entry. +% +% If you do not know the author (this is often the case for online +% entries), use the |key| field to add a key for sorting and citations, +% for example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% @online{TUGInstmem, +% key = {TUG}, +% year = 2017, +% title = "Institutional members of the {\TeX} Users Group", +% url = "http://wwtug.org/instmem.html", +% lastaccessed = "May 27, 2017", +% } +% \end{verbatim} +% +% A note about sorting. The current ACM bibliography styles always +% sort the entries according to authors names and publication year. +% There is a controversy about sorting names with ``von'' or ``van'' +% part: should Ludwig van Beethoven be sorted under ``V'' or under +% ``B''? The American practice is to use ``van'' in sorting, i.e. to +% file van Beethoven under ``V''. However, some authorities recommend +% to sort Dutch persons according to their last names (see +% e.g. \url{https://www.ifla.org/files/assets/cataloguing/pubs/names-of-persons_1996.pdf}). +% While I do not want to take a part in this dispute, I would like to +% point to the old ``noopsort'' trick by Oren Patashnik. Add to the +% \texttt{.bib} file the line +% \begin{verbatim} +% @PREAMBLE{"\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}"} +% \end{verbatim} +% and then encode the author as +% \begin{verbatim} +% author = {Ludwig {\noopsort{Beethoven}}van Beethoven}, +% \end{verbatim} +% This will make the author to be sorted as ``Beethoven'' rather than +% ``van Beethoven''. +% +% The current bst style defines a number of macros for common journal +% names. In particular, all journals listed in Table~\ref{tab:pubs} +% are includes, so you can use strings like |journal = taccess| for +% \emph{ACM Transactions on Accessible Computing}. +% +% \subsubsection{Processing using Bib\LaTeX} +% +% +% You will find in this package two sets of style files for Bib\LaTeX, +% \verb|acmnumeric| and \verb|acmauthoryear|, that mimic the behavior +% of the ACM-Reference-Format.bst Bib\TeX\ style. They provide you +% access to all the power of Bib\LaTeX\ and already include +% support for advanced citation of software artifacts from the +% \verb|biblatex-software| package, also separately available on CTAN. +% Look at the \verb|biblatex-software| documentation to learn more about +% what it offers. This support is highly experimental and currently +% is \emph{not} supported by TAPS! +% +% There are a few key differences in how the \LaTeX\ sources are set up +% when using Bib\LaTeX\ instead of Bib\TeX, that we summarize briefly +% here (please refer to the official Bib\LaTeX\ documentation for more details). +% +% First of all, you need to pass the \verb|natbib=false| option to the document class, +% and remove the \verb|\citestyle{acmauthoryear}| command from the sources (if present). +% +% Then, in the preamble of your document you need to load the Bib\LaTeX\ package +% and select the approriate bibliography style, as follows +% \begin{verbatim} +% \RequirePackage[ +% datamodel=acmdatamodel, +% style=acmnumeric, % use style=acmauthoryear for publications that require it +% ]{biblatex} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Also in the preamble, you need to declare the bibliography sources files +% using the \verb|\addbibresource| command (one \verb|\addbibresource| +% command per source file), e.g.: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \addbibresource{software.bib} +% \addbibresource{sample-base.bib} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% At the end of the document, where you want the bibliography to appear, +% you need to place the command \verb|\printbibliography|. +% +% Look at the \verb|sample-*-biblatex.tex| files that can be found in the samples +% directory after running \verb|make| for templates showcasing +% these Bib\LaTeX\ styles. + +% +% +%\subsubsection{Manual bibliography} +%\label{sec:ug_manual_bibliography} +% +% Some people create bibliographies manually, writing down +% \cs{bibitem} commands explicitly. This approach is \emph{not} +% recommended for ACM styles. The reason is, ACM submissions, besides +% being typeset, are also processed by special programs that extract +% metadata and references. Bibliographies created automatically with +% ACM styles contain customized macros for these programs, for +% example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \bibitem[Ablamowicz and Fauser(2007)]% +% {Ablamowicz07} +% \bibfield{author}{\bibinfo{person}{Rafal Ablamowicz} {and} +% \bibinfo{person}{Bertfried Fauser}.} \bibinfo{year}{2007}\natexlab{}. +% \newblock \bibinfo{booktitle}{\emph{CLIFFORD: a Maple 11 Package for Clifford +% Algebra Computations, version 11}}. +% \newblock +% \urldef\tempurl% +% \url{http://math.tntech.edu/rafal/cliff11/index.html} +% \showURL{% +% Retrieved February 28, 2008 from \tempurl} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Manual bibliographies without these macros may slow down the +% publication process, and thus are not recommended for ACM +% submissions. +% +%\subsection{Colors} +%\label{sec:ug_colors} +% +% While printed ACM publications are usually black and white, |screen| +% mode allows the use of colors. The ACM classes pre-define several +% colors according to~\cite{ACMIdentityStandards}: |ACMBlue|, +% |ACMYellow|, |ACMOrange|, |ACMRed|, |ACMLightBlue|, |ACMGreen|, +% |ACMPurple| and |ACMDarkBlue|. You can use them in color +% assignments. +% +% The ACM provides the following recommendation on color use. +% +% The most accessible approach would be to ensure that your article is +% still readable when printed in greyscale. The most notable reasons +% for this are: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item The most common type of inherited Color Vision Deficiency +% (CVD) is red-green (in which similar-brightness colors that differ +% only in their amounts of red or green are often confused), and it +% affects up to 8\% of males and 0.5\% of females of Northern European +% descent. +% \item The most common type of acquired Color Vision Deficiency (CVD) +% is blue-yellow (including mild cases for many older adults). +% \item Most printing is in black and white. +% \item Situational impairments (e.g., bright sunlight shining on a +% mobile screen) tend to reduce the entire color gamut, reducing color +% discriminability. +% \end{enumerate} +% +% \textbf{Note:} It is \emph{not} safe to encode information using +% only variations in color (i.e., only differences in hue and/or +% saturation) as there is bound to be someone affected! +% +% To ensure that you are using the most accessible colors, the ACM +% recommends that you choose sets of colors to help ensure suitable +% variations in when printed in greyscale by using either of the following tools: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item ColourBrewer: \url{http://colorbrewer2.org/} +% \item ACE: The Accessible Colour Evaluator: +% \url{http://daprlab.com/ace/} for designing WCAG 2.0 compliant +% palettes. +% \end{enumerate} +% +%\subsection{Other notable packages and typographic remarks} +%\label{sec:ug_other} +% +% Several other packages are recommended for specialized tasks. +% +% The package |subcaption|~\cite{Sommerfeldt13:Subcaption} is +% recommended for complex figures with several subplots or subfigures +% that require separate subcaptioning. The packages +% |nomencl|~\cite{Nomencl} and +% |glossaries|~\cite{Talbot16:Glossaries} can be used for the +% automatic creation of the lists of symbols and concepts used. +% +% +% By default |acmart| prevents all widows and orphans (i.e., lonely +% lines at the beginning or end of the page) and hyphenation at +% the end of the page. This is done by the rather strict settings +% \begin{verbatim} +% \widowpenalty=10000 +% \clubpenalty=10000 +% \brokenpenalty=10000 +% \end{verbatim} +% However, this may lead to frustrating results when the authors must +% obey a page limit. Setting these penalties to smaller values may +% help if you absolutely need to. +% +% Another problem might be the too strict line breaking rules. Again, +% a strategically placed \cs{sloppy} command or putting the +% problematic paragraph inside \texttt{sloppypar} environment might +% help---but beware, the results might be, well, sloppy. +% +% Note that the uppercasing in section titles is done using +% the |textcase| package~\cite{Carlisle04:Textcase}, so the command +% \cs{NoCaseChange} inside the title may help to prevent extraneous +% uppercasing. +% +% +%\subsection{Counting words} +%\label{sec:ug_counting} +% +% Some ACM conferences use word count limits for papers. The +% calculation of word number for a paper with math, tables and figures +% is not a trivial task. Currently the authoritative word count is +% done by translating the PDF to text and using |wc -w| on the +% output. Authors can use the package |texcount| (used by Overleaf) +% to get an estimate of the word count. To faciliate this one adds to the +% beginning of the package metacomments +% \begin{verbatim} +% %TC:macro \cite [option:text,text] +% %TC:macro \citep [option:text,text] +% %TC:macro \citet [option:text,text] +% %TC:envir table 0 1 +% %TC:envir table* 0 1 +% %TC:envir tabular [ignore] word +% %TC:envir displaymath 0 word +% %TC:envir math 0 word +% %TC:envir comment 0 0 +% \end{verbatim} +% and uses |\begin{math}...\end{math}| instead of dollar signs for +% math. Note that the count is in any case approximate, and the final +% decision of editors is based on PDF count. +% +% The script |texcount| provides a report of word count in the +% document. +% +% +% +%\subsection{Disabled or forbidden commands} +%\label{sec:ug_disabled} +% +% The goal of |acmart| package is to provide a uniform look and feel +% for ACM publications. Accordingly, a number of commands is +% forbidden or disabled in |acmart|. +% +% You may \emph{not} put several authors or several e-mails into a +% \cs{author} or \cs{email} command. This may lead to errors or +% warning. +% +% You cannot change \cs{baselinestretch} in your document: this +% produces an error. +% +% You should not abuse the command \cs{vspace}: this command may +% disturb the typesetting of ACM papers. +% +% You should not load |amssymb| package since the package |acmart| +% defines the corresponding symbols itself. +% +%\subsection{Notes for wizards} +%\label{sec:ug_preload} +% +% Sometimes you need to change the behavior of |acmart|. The +% usual way to do this is to redefine commands in the preamble. +% However, these definitions are executed \emph{after} |acmart| is +% loaded and certain decisions are made. This presents a number of +% problems. +% +% For example, one may want to use the |titletoc| package with |acmart|. +% This package should be loaded before |hyperref|. However, since +% |acmart| loads |hyperref| itself, the line |\usepackage{titletoc}| +% in the preamble will lead to grief (see +% \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/357265/using-titletoc-with-acm-acmart-style}). +% +% Another example is passing options to a package. Suppose you want to +% use the |dvipsnames| option of the |xcolor| package. Normally you cannot do +% this because |acmart| loads this package itself without options. +% +% The file |acmart-preload-hook.tex| can be used to solve these +% problems. If this file exists, it will be processed before any other +% package. You can use this file to load packages or pass options to +% them. For example, if you put in this file +% \begin{verbatim} +% \let\LoadClassOrig\LoadClass +% \renewcommand\LoadClass[2][]{\LoadClassOrig[#1]{#2}% +% \usepackage{titletoc}} +% \end{verbatim} +% then |titletoc| will be loaded before |hyperref|. If you put in +% this file +% \begin{verbatim} +% \PassOptionsToPackage{dvipsnames}{xcolor} +% \end{verbatim} +% you will pass |dvipsnames| to |xcolor|. +% +% \textbf{Important note.} This hook makes it too easy to create a +% manuscript that is not acceptable by the ACM. It is even easier to +% create a file that cannot be compiled. So please do not use it +% \emph{unless you know what you are doing.} And if you use it, +% \emph{do not ask for support.} If you decide to use this hook, you +% are on your own. +% +% \DescribeMacro{\AtBeginMaketitle}% +% Another hook is \cs{AtBeginMaketitle}. The commands in this hook +% are executed before \cs{maketitle}. +% +% +%\subsection{Currently supported publications} +%\label{sec:pubs} +% +%\bgroup\centering +% \begin{longtable}{>{\ttfamily}p{0.2\textwidth}@{}p{0.8\textwidth}} +% \caption{ACM publications and arguments of the \cs{acmJournal} +% command} +% \label{tab:pubs}\\ +% \toprule +% \normalfont Abbreviation & Publication \\ +% \midrule +% \endfirsthead +% \caption[]{ACM publications and arguments of the \cs{acmJournal} +% command (continued)}\\ +% \toprule +% \normalfont Abbreviation & Publication \\ +% \midrule +% \endhead +% \bottomrule +% \endfoot +% ACMJCSS & ACM Journal on Computing and Sustainable Societies \\ +% ACMJDS & ACM Journal of Data Science\\ +% AILET & ACM AI Letters\\ +% CIE & ACM Computers in Entertainment \\ +% CSUR & ACM Computing Surveys\\ +% DLT & Distributed Ledger Technologies: Research and Practice\\ +% DGOV & Digital Government: Research and Practice \\ +% DTRAP & Digital Threats: Research and Practice\\ +% FAC & Formal Aspects of Computing \\ +% GAMES & ACM Games: Research and Practice\\ +% HEALTH & ACM Transactions on Computing for Healthcare\\ +% IMWUT & PACM on Interactive, Mobile, Wearable and Ubiquitous +% Technologies\\ +% JACM & Journal of the ACM \\ +% JATS & ACM Journal on Autonomous Transportation Systems \\ +% JDIQ & ACM Journal of Data and Information Quality \\ +% JDS & ACM Journal of Data Science \\ +% JEA & ACM Journal of Experimental Algorithmics \\ +% JERIC & ACM Journal of Educational Resources in Computing\\ +% JETC & ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems \\ +% JOCCH & ACM Journal on Computing and Cultural Heritage \\ +% JRC & ACM Journal on Responsible Computing \\ +% PACMCGIT & Proceedings of the ACM on Computer Graphics and +% Interactive Techniques\\ +% PACMHCI & PACM on Human-Computer Interaction\\ +% PACMOD & PACM on Management of Data\\ +% PACMNET & PACM on Networking\\ +% PACMPL & PACM on Programming Languages \\ +% PACMSE & PACM on Software Engineering \\ +% POMACS & PACM on Measurement and Analysis of Computing Systems \\ +% TAAS & ACM Transactions on Autonomous and Adaptive Systems\\ +% TACCESS & ACM Transactions on Accessible Computing\\ +% TACO & ACM Transactions on Architecture and Code Optimization \\ +% TAIS & ACM Transactions on AI for Science\\ +% TAISAP & ACM Transactions on AI Security and Privacy\\ +% TALG & ACM Transactions on Algorithms \\ +% TALLIP & ACM Transactions on Asian and Low-Resource Language +% Information Processing\\ +% TAP & ACM Transactions on Applied Perception \\ +% TCPS & ACM Transactions on Cyber-Physical Systems\\ +% TDS & ACM Transactions on Data Science\\ +% TEAC & ACM Transactions on Economics and Computation\\ +% TECS & ACM Transactions on Embedded Computing Systems \\ +% TELO & ACM Transactions on Evolutionary Learning and Optimization\\ +% THRI & ACM Transactions on Human-Robot Interaction\\ +% TIIS & ACM Transactions on Interactive Intelligent Systems\\ +% TIOT & ACM Transactions on Internet of Things \\ +% TISSEC & ACM Transactions on Information and System Security\\ +% TIST & ACM Transactions on Intelligent Systems and Technology \\ +% TKDD & ACM Transactions on Knowledge Discovery from Data\\ +% TMIS & ACM Transactions on Management Information Systems\\ +% TOCE & ACM Transactions on Computing Education\\ +% TOCHI & ACM Transactions on Computer-Human Interaction\\ +% TOCL & ACM Transactions on Computational Logic\\ +% TOCS & ACM Transactions on Computer Systems \\ +% TOCT & ACM Transactions on Computation Theory \\ +% TODAES & ACM Transactions on Design Automation of Electronic Systems\\ +% TODS & ACM Transactions on Database Systems\\ +% TOG & ACM Transactions on Graphics\\ +% TOIS & ACM Transactions on Information Systems\\ +% TOIT & ACM Transactions on Internet Technology\\ +% TOMACS & ACM Transactions on Modeling and Computer Simulation \\ +% TOMM & ACM Transactions on Multimedia Computing, Communications +% and Applications \\ +% TOMPECS & ACM Transactions on Modeling and Performance Evaluation +% of Computing Systems\\ +% TOMS & ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software\\ +% TOPC & ACM Transactions on Parallel Computing\\ +% TOPLAS & ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems\\ +% TOPML & ACM Transactions on Probabilistic Machine Learning\\ +% TOPS & ACM Transactions on Privacy and Security\\ +% TORS & ACM Transactions on Recommender Systems\\ +% TOS & ACM Transactions on Storage\\ +% TOSEM & ACM Transactions on Software Engineering and Methodology\\ +% TOSN & ACM Transactions on Sensor Networks\\ +% TQC & ACM Transactions on Quantum Computing\\ +% TRETS & ACM Transactions on Reconfigurable Technology and Systems\\ +% TSAS & ACM Transactions on Spatial Algorithms and Systems\\ +% TSC & ACM Transactions on Social Computing\\ +% TSLP & ACM Transactions on Speech and Language Processing \\ +% TWEB & ACM Transactions on the Web\\ +% \end{longtable} +%\egroup +% +% Besides the publications listed in Table~\ref{tab:pubs}, there is a +% special ``publication'' type FACMP, a forthcoming ACM publication, +% reserved for new journals which are not assigned an ISSN yet. +% +% +%\subsection{Samples} +%\label{sec:samples} +% +% There are several samples of acmart documents, that can serve as +% templates for the authors. Among them +% |sample-sig...| are templates for conference papers, while +% |sample-acm...| are templates for journal articles and special +% materials. +% +% Here is the list of the samples: +% \begin{description} +% \item[acmmanuscript:] A proceedings paper in the manuscript format. +% \item[acmsmall:] A journal paper in the |acmsmall| format. +% \item[acmsmall-biblatex:] A journal paper using experimental +% \textsl{biblatex} bibliography processing. +% \item[acmlarge:] A journal paper in the |acmlarge| format. +% \item[acmtog:] A journal paper in the |acmtog| format. +% \item[sigconf:] A proceedings paper in the standard |sigconf| +% format. +% \item[sigconf-biblatex:] A proceedings paper in the |sigconf| +% format using experimental \textsl{biblatex} bibliography +% processing. +% \item[sigconf-authordraft:] A proceedings paper in the +% |sigconf| format with the |authordraft| option selected. +% \item[sigconf-i13n:] A proceedings paper in the +% |sigconf| format with multilanguage titles and abstract. +% \item[sigconf-lualatex:] A proceedings paper in the +% |sigconf| format, Lua\LaTeX\ version. +% \item[sigplan:] A proceedings paper in the |sigplan| format. +% \item[acmsmall-conf:] A proceedings paper in the |acmsmall| +% format for the publication in a journal using this option. +% \item[acmtog-conf:] A proceedings paper in the |acmtog| +% format for the publication in a journal using this option. +% \item[acmcp:] A sample of ACM Cover Page used by JDS. +% \item[acmengage:] A sample of ACM Engage publication. +% \item[acmsmall-tagged:] A journal paper in the |acmsmall| format +% with the tagging code, see Section~\ref{sec:ug-tagging}. +% \item[sigconf-tagged:] A proceedings paper in the standard |sigconf| +% format with the tagging code, see Section~\ref{sec:ug-tagging}. +% \end{description} +% +% +% +%\subsection{A note about \texttt{sigchi-a} format} +%\label{sec:sigchi-a} +% +% Starting in Spring 2020 ACM retired SIGCHI Extended Abstract format +% (|sigchi-a|). ACM will not, under any circumstances, accept +% documents in this format for publication and will not offer +% technical support to the authors who use this template. +% +% You may use this format in the |nonacm| mode only, as in +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[sigchi-a, nonacm]{acmart} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% +% \DescribeEnv{sidebar}% +% \DescribeEnv{marginfigure}% +% \DescribeEnv{margintable}% +% This format has large margin uses for special figures and +% tables. This package provides three environments for this with +% optional captions: +% \begin{description} +% \item[sidebar:] textual information in the margin, +% \item[marginfigure:] a figure in the margin, +% \item[margintable:] a table in the margin. +% \end{description} +% +% The environments |figure| and |table| produce figures and tables +% with the width of the text column. The environments |figure*| and +% |table*| produce ``wide'' figures and tables, which take a large +% part of the margin. +% +% The horizontal sizes of figures are: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item |figure|: \cs{columnwidth}, +% \item |marginfigure|: \cs{marginparwidth}, +% \item |figure*|: \cs{fulltextwidth}. +% \end{enumerate} +% +% +% +% \StopEventually{ +% \clearpage +% \bibliography{acmart} +% \bibliographystyle{unsrt}} +% +% \clearpage +% +% +%\section{Implementation} +%\label{sec:impl} +% +%\subsection{Identification} +%\label{sec:ident} +% +% We start with a declaration of who we are. Most |.dtx| files put +% driver code in a separate~|.drv| driver file. We roll this code into the +% main file and use the pseudo-guard || for it. +% \begin{macrocode} +%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +%<*gobble> +\ProvidesFile{acmart.dtx} +% +%\ProvidesClass{acmart} +%\ProvidesClass{acmart-tagged} +[2026/08/16 v2.20 Typesetting articles for the Association for Computing Machinery] +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v1.00}{2016/04/14}{First released version} +% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Defined ACM colors} +% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Changed hyperref colors in screen mode +% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/1})} +% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Set headheight to 1pc for all formats +% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/5})} +% \changes{v1.02}{2016/04/21}{Documentation changes +% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/13})} +% \changes{v1.02}{2016/04/21}{Added TOPS and TSC +% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/12})} +% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added authorversion option +% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/9})} +% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added anonsuppress environment} +% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Updated bibliography for siggraph} +% \changes{v1.05}{2016/04/27}{Patched \cs{setcitestyle} command; +% closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/19}} +% \changes{v1.05}{2016/04/27}{Added processing doi numbers for +% acmsiggraph and doi numbers for sigproc.bib} +% \changes{v1.08}{2016/05/13}{SIGPLAN reformatting by Matthew Fluet} +% \changes{v1.08}{2016/05/13}{Typos corrected (Tobias Pape)} +% \changes{v1.09}{2016/05/18}{Revert SIGPLAN caption rules} +% \changes{v1.11}{2016/05/27}{Customization of ACM theorem styles and +% proof environment by Matthew Fluet} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Documentation updates} +% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{\cs{citestyle} updates (Matthew Fluet)} +% \changes{v1.16}{2016/07/07}{Formatting header/footer (Matthew +% Fluet)} +% \changes{v1.18}{2016/07/10}{Natbib is now the default for all +% formats} +% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'Abstract', 'Acknowledgements', +% and 'References' in PDF bookmarks (Matthew Fluet)} +% \changes{v1.20}{2016/08/06}{Bug fixes for bst} +% \changes{v1.22}{2016/09/25}{More bibliography changes for Aptara} +% \changes{v1.23}{2016/11/04}{Add PACMPL journal option} +% \changes{v1.26}{2016/12/24}{Corrected \cs{shortcite} bug} +% \changes{v1.26}{2016/12/24}{Documentation typos fixed (thanks to +% Stephen Spencer)} +% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/04}{Bibtex style now recognizes https:// in +% doi} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Documentation changes} +% \changes{v1.32}{2017/03/07}{Format siggraph is now obsolete} +% \changes{v1.32}{2017/03/07}{Added POMACS journal option} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/12}{BibTeX crossref bug corrected} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/18}{BibTeX comma before articleno bug +% corrected} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/18}{BibTeX numpages bug corrected} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added acmart-preload-hook} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/33}{Documentation updates} +% \changes{v1.35}{2017/04/23}{BibTeX bug fixed: et al.} +% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/12}{Added the possibility to adjust number of +% author boxes per row in conference formats} +% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Set \cs{normalparindent}; Reduce list +% indentation (Matthew Fluet)}% +% \changes{v1.38}{2017/05/13}{Increase default font size for SIGPLAN} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Bibliography changes} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{Added package cleveref} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/16}{Added new copyright version: +% licensedcagov} +% \changes{v1.41}{2017/06/25}{Added new badges} +% \changes{v1.42}{2017/07/02}{Deleted ACM badges} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Added package refcount} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Deleted package cleveref} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Put theorem defs in a separate style} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/17}{Bst file bug fixes: label width is +% calculated correctly} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{Added etoolbox} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/29}{Restore theorem defs to class file} +% \changes{v1.47}{2017/08/31}{New journal: THRI} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/09}{Typos fixed (Jamie Davis)} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Code prettying (Michael D.~Adams)} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/23}{Misc entries in the bibliography no +% longer produce a separate date} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/10/01}{Initial support for Biblatex (Daniel Thomas)} +% \changes{1.48}{2017/10/14}{Bib code cleanup (Zack Weinberg)} +% \changes{1.48}{2017/12/03}{Documentation update (siggraph)} +% \changes{1.49}{2018/01/24}{New journal: DTRAP} +% \changes{1.53}{2018/04/14}{New journals: PACMCGIT, TIOT, TDSCI} +% \changes{1.53}{2018/04/14}{Rearranged docs} +% \changes{1.54}{2018/06/17}{Moved footnote stuff before hyperref call +% (Ross Moore)} +% \changes{1.56}{2018/11/11}{Documented \cs{Description}} +% \changes{1.57}{2018/12/16}{Booktabs package is now the default} +% \changes{1.58}{2019/02/09}{Changes in samples (Enrico Gregorio)} +% \changes{1.58}{2019/03/29}{New journal: HEALTH. TDS is renamed to +% TDSCI} +% \changes{1.60}{2019/04/22}{New option: urlbreakonhyphens} +% \changes{1.62}{2019/07/31}{New journal: TELO} +% \changes{1.63}{2019/08/04}{New journal: TQUANT} +% \changes{1.63}{2019/08/04}{New journal: FACMP} +% \changes{1.63a}{2019/08/05}{Move: TQUANT to TQC} +% \changes{1.64}{2019/08/17}{Putting abstract after \cs{maketitle} now +% causes an error} +% \changes{1.65}{2019/10/19}{New journal: DGOV} +% \changes{1.66}{2019/12/18}{ACM reference format is now mandatory for +% papers over one page; CCS concepts and keywords are now mandatory for +% papers over two pages} +% \changes{1.66}{2019/12/18}{Authors' addresses are mandatory for +% journal articles} +% \changes{1.71}{2020/05/01}{Retired sigchi and sigchi-a} +% \changes{1.71}{2020/05/02}{Bibliography change: volume for +% @inproceedings is now in brackets together with series} +% \changes{1.71}{2020/05/02}{LuaTeX now uses the OTF versions of +% fonts} +% \changes{1.75}{2020/10/29}{Documentation update} +% \changes{1.78}{2021/05/01}{Documentation update: Word count} +% \changes{1.84}{2022/04/09}{New journals: JDS, GAMES} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added CC licenses} +% \changes{1.87}{2022/08/02}{New format: |acmcp|} +% \changes{1.90a}{2023/06/11}{Changes in the sample keywords and concepts} +% \changes{1.92}{2023/09/30}{Documentation update: use of `anonymous' +% throughout} +% \changes{v1.93}{2023/10/22}{Added PACMSE journal option} +% \changes{v2.01}{2024/01/06}{Documentation update: POMACS uses acmsmall} +% \changes{v2.03}{2024/02/04}{Added documentation about samples} +% \changes{v2.17}{2025/11/01}{Rearranged documentation} +% \changes{v2.17}{2025/11/01}{Added tagging documentation} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/23}{Merged tagged branch} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/23}{Keywords are now deprecated. Deleted +% them from the samples} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/23}{Revised documentation} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/31}{Moved note before url (suggested by +% David F. Kotz)} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/31}{Deleted IMS designation} +% \changes{v2.19}{2026/06/27}{ACM cleared their position about +% keywords. Re-added them} +% +% And the driver code: +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*gobble> +\documentclass{ltxdoc} +\usepackage{array,booktabs,amsmath,graphicx,fancyvrb,tabularx, longtable} +\usepackage[tt=false, type1=true]{libertine} +\usepackage[varqu]{zi4} +\usepackage[libertine]{newtxmath} +\usepackage[tableposition=top]{caption} +\usepackage{hypdoc} +\PageIndex +\CodelineIndex +\RecordChanges +\EnableCrossrefs +\begin{document} + \DocInput{acmart.dtx} +\end{document} +% +%<*class> +\def\@classname{acmart} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +%\subsection{Preload hook} +%\label{sec:preload} +% +% We preload |acmart-preload-hook|: +% \begin{macrocode} +\InputIfFileExists{acmart-preload-hook.tex}{% + \ClassWarning{\@classname}{% + I am loading acmart-preload-hook.tex. You are fully responsible + for any problems from now on.}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +%\subsection{Tagging and old kernels} +%\label{sec:tagging} +% +% We want to use \cs{DocumentMetadata} command, but what with the old +% kernels which some authors might use? Here we just switch off the +% tagging code if this is not defined +% \begin{macro}{\IfDocumentMetadata} +% \changes{v2.16}{2025/11/01}{Provided stubs for old kernels} +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand{\IfDocumentMetadataTF}{\@secondoftwo} +\providecommand{\IfDocumentMetadataT}{\@gobble} +\providecommand{\IfDocumentMetadataF}{\@firstofone} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Options} +% \label{sec:options} +% +% We need |xkeyval| since some of our options may have values: +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{xkeyval} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We use |xstring| to check whether user input is valid +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{xstring} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We need |iftex| to check the engine +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{iftex} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{format} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{New format: acmengage} +% \changes{1.87}{2022/08/13}{New format: acmcp} +% The possible formats +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@choicekey*+{\@classname.cls}{format}[\ACM@format\ACM@format@nr]{% + manuscript, acmsmall, acmlarge, acmtog, sigconf, siggraph, + sigplan, sigchi, sigchi-a, acmengage, acmcp}[manuscript]{}{% + \ClassError{\@classname}{The option format must be manuscript, + acmsmall, acmlarge, acmtog, sigconf, siggraph, + sigplan, sigchi or sigchi-a}} +\def\@DeclareACMFormat#1{\DeclareOptionX{#1}{\setkeys{\@classname.cls}{format=#1}}} +\@DeclareACMFormat{manuscript} +\@DeclareACMFormat{acmsmall} +\@DeclareACMFormat{acmlarge} +\@DeclareACMFormat{acmtog} +\@DeclareACMFormat{sigconf} +\@DeclareACMFormat{siggraph} +\@DeclareACMFormat{sigplan} +\@DeclareACMFormat{sigchi} +\@DeclareACMFormat{sigchi-a} +\@DeclareACMFormat{acmengage} +\@DeclareACMFormat{acmcp} +\ExecuteOptionsX{format} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@screen} +% Whether we use screen mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{screen}[true]{% + \if@ACM@screen + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using screen mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option screen can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{screen=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@urlbreakonhyphens} +% \changes{1.60}{2019/04/22}{introduced macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{urlbreakonhyphens}[true]{% + \if@ACM@urlbreakonhyphens + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using breaking urls on hyphens}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not breaking urls on hyphens}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option urlbreakonhyphens can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{urlbreakonhyphens=true} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@acmthm} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/29}{Modified description} +% Whether we define theorem-like environments. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{acmthm}[true]{% + \if@ACM@acmthm + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Requiring acmthm}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing acmthm}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option acmthm can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{acmthm=true} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@review} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/09}{Review mode now switches on folios} +% Whether we use review mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{review}[true]{% + \if@ACM@review + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using review mode}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ACM@printfoliostrue}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using review mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option review can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{review=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@authorversion} +% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added macro} +% Whether we use author's-version mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{authorversion}[true]{% + \if@ACM@authorversion + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using authorversion mode}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using authorversion mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option authorversion can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{authorversion=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@nonacm} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/05/08}{Added macro} +% Special option for non-ACM publications +% using the ACM typesetting options. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{nonacm}[true]{% + \if@ACM@nonacm + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using nonacm mode}% + \AtBeginDocument{\@ACM@printacmreffalse}% + % in 'nonacm' mode we disable the "ACM Reference Format" + % printing by default, but this can be re-enabled by the + % user using \settopmatter{printacmref=true} + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using nonacm mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option nonacm can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{nonacm=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@balance} +% \changes{v1.57}{2018/12/16}{Added macro} +% Whether to balance the last page +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{balance}[true]{}{% + \PackageError{\@classname}{The option balance can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{balance} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@pbalance} +% \changes{v1.76}{2021/03/16}{Added macro} +% Whether to balance the last page +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{pbalance}[true]{}{% + \PackageError{\@classname}{The option pbalance can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{pbalance=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@natbib@override} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Deleted macro} +% This macro is no longer used. +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@natbib} +% Whether we use |natbib| mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{natbib}[true]{% + \if@ACM@natbib + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Explicitly selecting natbib mode}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Explicitly deselecting natbib mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option natbib can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{natbib=true} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@anonymous} +% Whether we use anonymous mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{anonymous}[true]{% + \if@ACM@anonymous + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using anonymous mode}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using anonymous mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option anonymous can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{anonymous=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@timestamp} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added macro (Michael D.~Adams)} +% Whether we use timestamp mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{timestamp}[true]{% + \if@ACM@timestamp + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using timestamp mode}% + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using timestamp mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option timestamp can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{timestamp=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@authordraft} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/13}{Corrected typo, thanks to bargteil} +% Whether we use author-draft mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{\@classname.cls}[@ACM@]{authordraft}[true]{% + \if@ACM@authordraft + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using authordraft mode}% + \@ACM@timestamptrue + \@ACM@reviewtrue + \else + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Not using authordraft mode}% + \fi}{\PackageError{\@classname}{The option authordraft can be either true or + false}} +\ExecuteOptionsX{authordraft=false} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@fontsize} +% The font size to pass to the base class +% \begin{macrocode} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/27}{Added fontsize 8pt} +\def\ACM@fontsize{} +\DeclareOptionX{8pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}} +\DeclareOptionX{9pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}} +\DeclareOptionX{10pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}} +\DeclareOptionX{11pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}} +\DeclareOptionX{12pt}{\edef\ACM@fontsize{\CurrentOption}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@languages} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/19}{Introduced macro} +% The languages of the document +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ACM@languages{} +\DeclareOptionX{language}{% + \ifx\ACM@languages\@empty + \gdef\ACM@languages{english}\fi + \g@addto@macro\ACM@languages{, #1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.01}{2016/04/18}{Explicitly put draft option +% (closes \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/4})} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOptionX{draft}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{amsart}} +\DeclareOptionX{*}{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{amsart}} +\ProcessOptionsX +\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Using format \ACM@format, number \ACM@format@nr} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +%\subsection{Setting switches} +%\label{sec:switches} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@manuscript} +% Whether we use manuscript mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@manuscript +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@journal} +% There are two kinds of publications: journals and books +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@journal +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@journal@bibstrip} +% \changes{v1.59}{2019/04/20}{Introduced macro} +% Sometimes ACM wants a journal-like publication to have conference +% information in the bibstrip and vice versa, so we have an additional +% switch. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@journal@bibstrip +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@tog} +% \changes{v2.03}{2024/02/04}{Introduced macro} +% ACM TOG sometimes uses journal-like bibstrip even for conference +% proceedings, so we need to set it separately +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@tog +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@sigchiamode} +% The formatting of SIGCHI extended abstracts is quite unusual. We have a +% special switch for them. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@sigchiamode +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@engage} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/05}{Introduced macro} +% ACM Engage course materials have special formatting +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@engage +\@ACM@engagefalse +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@acmcp} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/12}{Introduced macro} +% ACM cover page formatting +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@acmcp +\@ACM@acmcpfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% Setting up switches +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifnum\ACM@format@nr=5\relax % siggraph +\ClassWarning{\@classname}{% + The format siggraph is now obsolete.\MessageBreak + I am switching to sigconf.} + \setkeys{\@classname.cls}{format=sigconf} +\fi +\ifnum\ACM@format@nr=7\relax % sigchi +\ClassWarning{\@classname}{% + The format sigchi is now obsolete.\MessageBreak + I am switching to sigconf.} + \setkeys{\@classname.cls}{format=sigconf} +\fi +\ifnum\ACM@format@nr=8\relax % sigchi +\ClassWarning{\@classname}{% + ACM SIGCHI has retired the SIGCHI-A template\MessageBreak + effective immediately. ACM is keeping this template\MessageBreak + option available to authors who are working on legacy\MessageBreak + documents only. ACM will not, under any circumstances,\MessageBreak + accept documents in this format for publication and\MessageBreak + will not offer technical support to the authors who use\MessageBreak + this template.\MessageBreak + ACM SIGCHI is directing Conference leaders and\MessageBreak + authors to publish their articles using the SIGCONF\MessageBreak + template call.} +\fi +\ifnum\ACM@format@nr=0\relax + \@ACM@manuscripttrue +\else + \@ACM@manuscriptfalse +\fi +\@ACM@sigchiamodefalse +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript + \@ACM@journaltrue +\or % acmsmall + \@ACM@journaltrue +\or % acmlarge + \@ACM@journaltrue +\or % acmtog + \@ACM@journaltrue + \@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@togtrue +\or % sigconf + \@ACM@journalfalse +\or % siggraph + \@ACM@journalfalse + \or % sigplan + \@ACM@journalfalse + \or % sigchi + \@ACM@journalfalse +\or % sigchi-a + \@ACM@journalfalse + \@ACM@sigchiamodetrue +\or % acmengage + \@ACM@journalfalse + \@ACM@engagetrue +\or % acmcp + \@ACM@journaltrue + \@ACM@acmcptrue + \AtBeginDocument{\@ACM@printacmreffalse}% +\fi +\if@ACM@journal + \@ACM@journal@bibstriptrue + \@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@togtrue +\else + \@ACM@journal@bibstripfalse +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +%\subsection{Loading the base class and package} +%\label{sec:loading} +% +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Increased font size for ACM Large} +% \changes{v1.38}{2017/05/13}{Increase default font size for SIGPLAN} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/27}{Set font sizes for |acmengage| and |acmcp|} +% +% \changes{v2.09}{2022/08/25}{Saved the old definitions (Ulrike's +% code} +% \changes{v2.17}{2026/01/03}{Moved tagged code to the main class} +% Before we load the base class we want to save the original +% definitions of sectioning commands since |acmart| redefines them, +% and we need the vanilla versions. +% \begin{macro}{\@startsection@kernel} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/11/19}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@startsection@kernel\@startsection +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@xsect@kernel} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/11/19}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@xsect@kernel\@xsect +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@sect@kernel} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/11/19}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@sect@kernel\@sect +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect@kernel} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/11/19}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@ssect@kernel\@ssect +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% At this point we either have \cs{ACM@fontsize} or use defaults +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\ACM@fontsize\@empty + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}% + \or % acmsmall + \def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}% + \or % acmlarge + \def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}% + \or % acmtog + \def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}% + \or % sigconf + \def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}% + \or % siggraph + \def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}% + \or % sigplan + \def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}% + \or % sigchi + \def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}% + \or % sigchi-a + \def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}% + \or % acmengage + \def\ACM@fontsize{10pt}% + \or % acmcp + \def\ACM@fontsize{9pt}% + \fi +\fi +\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Using fontsize \ACM@fontsize} +\LoadClass[\ACM@fontsize, reqno]{amsart} +\RequirePackage{microtype} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% We need |etoolbox| for delayed code +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{etoolbox} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Booktabs is now the default +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{booktabs} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% We need |totpages| to calculate the number of pages and +% |refcount| to use that number +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{refcount} +\RequirePackage{totpages} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The \cs{collect@body} macro in |amsmath| is defined using \cs{def}. We load +% |environ| to access the \cs{long} version of this command +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{environ} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We use |setspace| for double spacing +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@manuscript +\RequirePackage{setspace} +\onehalfspacing +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/05}{Added `textcase' package} +% \changes{v2.12}{2024/12/28}{Removed `textcase' package} +% We no longer need |textcase| for better upcasing. +% \begin{macrocode} +% \RequirePackage{textcase} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/14}{Added `framed' package for acmcp} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/25}{Added `zref-savepos' package for acmcp} +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@acmcp +\RequirePackage{framed} +\RequirePackage{zref-savepos, zref-user} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@acmcp@delta} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/25}{Added dimen} +% We need to store the dimen to store the insert length of amcp box +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\@ACM@acmcp@delta +\@ACM@acmcp@delta=0pt\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +%\subsection{Citations} +% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'References' in PDF bookmarks +% (Matthew Fluet)} +% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{Patched \cs{citestyle}} +% \changes{v1.55}{2016/08/012}{Typo corrected (Zack Weinberg)} +% We patch \cs{setcitestyle} to allow, for example, +% \cs{setcitestyle}|{sort}| and \cs{setcitestyle}|{nosort}|. We patch +% \cs{citestyle} to warn about undefined citation styles. +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@natbib + \RequirePackage{natbib} + \renewcommand{\bibsection}{% + \section*{\refname}% + \phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% + } + \renewcommand{\bibfont}{\bibliofont} + \renewcommand\setcitestyle[1]{ + \@for\@tempa:=#1\do + {\def\@tempb{round}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \renewcommand\NAT@open{(}\renewcommand\NAT@close{)}\fi + \def\@tempb{square}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \renewcommand\NAT@open{[}\renewcommand\NAT@close{]}\fi + \def\@tempb{angle}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \renewcommand\NAT@open{$<$}\renewcommand\NAT@close{$>$}\fi + \def\@tempb{curly}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \renewcommand\NAT@open{\{}\renewcommand\NAT@close{\}}\fi + \def\@tempb{semicolon}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \renewcommand\NAT@sep{;}\fi + \def\@tempb{colon}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \renewcommand\NAT@sep{;}\fi + \def\@tempb{comma}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \renewcommand\NAT@sep{,}\fi + \def\@tempb{authoryear}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \NAT@numbersfalse\fi + \def\@tempb{numbers}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \NAT@numberstrue\NAT@superfalse\fi + \def\@tempb{super}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \NAT@numberstrue\NAT@supertrue\fi + \def\@tempb{nobibstyle}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \let\bibstyle=\@gobble\fi + \def\@tempb{bibstyle}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \let\bibstyle=\@citestyle\fi + \def\@tempb{sort}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \def\NAT@sort{\@ne}\fi + \def\@tempb{nosort}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \def\NAT@sort{\z@}\fi + \def\@tempb{compress}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \def\NAT@cmprs{\@ne}\fi + \def\@tempb{nocompress}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}\fi + \def\@tempb{sort&compress}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \def\NAT@sort{\@ne}\def\NAT@cmprs{\@ne}\fi + \def\@tempb{mcite}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \let\NAT@merge\@ne\fi + \def\@tempb{merge}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \@ifnum{\NAT@merge<\tw@}{\let\NAT@merge\tw@}{}\fi + \def\@tempb{elide}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \@ifnum{\NAT@merge<\thr@@}{\let\NAT@merge\thr@@}{}\fi + \def\@tempb{longnamesfirst}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \NAT@longnamestrue\fi + \def\@tempb{nonamebreak}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \def\NAT@nmfmt#1{\mbox{\NAT@up#1}}\fi + \expandafter\NAT@find@eq\@tempa=\relax\@nil + \if\@tempc\relax\else + \expandafter\NAT@rem@eq\@tempc + \def\@tempb{open}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \xdef\NAT@open{\@tempc}\fi + \def\@tempb{close}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \xdef\NAT@close{\@tempc}\fi + \def\@tempb{aysep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \xdef\NAT@aysep{\@tempc}\fi + \def\@tempb{yysep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \xdef\NAT@yrsep{\@tempc}\fi + \def\@tempb{notesep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \xdef\NAT@cmt{\@tempc}\fi + \def\@tempb{citesep}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb + \xdef\NAT@sep{\@tempc}\fi + \fi + }% + \NAT@@setcites + } + \renewcommand\citestyle[1]{% + \ifcsname bibstyle@#1\endcsname% + \csname bibstyle@#1\endcsname\let\bibstyle\@gobble% + \else% + \@latex@error{Undefined `#1' citestyle}% + \fi + }% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@acmauthoryear} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{Moved def of \cs{bibstyle@acmauthoryear} +% before use} +% \changes{v1.35}{2017/04/13}{Square brackets for author-year style} +% The default author-year format: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\bibstyle@acmauthoryear}{% + \setcitestyle{% + authoryear,% + open={[},close={]},citesep={;},% + aysep={},yysep={,},% + notesep={, }}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibstyle@acmnumeric} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.14}{2016/06/09}{Moved def of \cs{bibstyle@numeric} +% before use} +% The default numeric format: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\bibstyle@acmnumeric}{% + \setcitestyle{% + numbers,sort&compress,% + open={[},close={]},citesep={,},% + notesep={, }}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.28}{2017/01/07}{Corrected option natbib behavior} +% The default is numeric: +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@natbib +\citestyle{acmnumeric} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +%\subsection{Internationalization} +%\label{sec:i13n} +% +% +% +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/19}{Use babel for multilanguage papers} +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@journal + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Additional Key Words and Phrases}% +\else + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Keywords}% +\fi +\if@ACM@engage + \renewcommand\abstractname{Synopsis}% +\fi +\ifx\ACM@languages\@empty +\else + \RequirePackage[\ACM@languages]{babel}% + \addto\captionsenglish{% + \if@ACM@journal + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Additional Key Words and Phrases}% + \else + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Keywords}% + \fi + \renewcommand\acksname{Acknowledgements}% + \if@ACM@engage + \renewcommand\abstractname{Synopsis}% + \fi + }% + \addto\captionsfrench{% + \if@ACM@journal + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Mots Clés et Phrases Supplémentaires}% + \else + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Mots clés}% + \fi + \renewcommand\acksname{Remerciements}% + }% + \addto\captionsgerman{% + \if@ACM@journal + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Zusätzliche Schlagwörter und Phrasen}% + \else + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Schlagwörter}% + \fi + \renewcommand\acksname{Danksagungen}% + }% + \addto\captionsspanish{% + \if@ACM@journal + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Palabras y Frases Claves Adicionales}% + \else + \renewcommand\keywordsname{Palabras claves}% + \fi + \renewcommand\acksname{Expresiones de gratitud}% + }% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@lang@check} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% Some commands should not be used if the document is monlingual +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\ACM@lang@check[1]{% + \ifx\ACM@languages\@empty\relax + \ClassError{\@classname}{% + Command \string#1 \MessageBreak is used in monlingual document}{% + You used a command (\string#1) \MessageBreak + that does not have a meaning \MessageBreak + unless are languages are defined. \MessageBreak + Please choose the languages in \string\documentclass + \MessageBreak + (e.g. \string\documentclass[languages={french, english}]{acmart}), + \MessageBreak + or delete the command.}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@translatedtitle} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@translatedtitle{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\translatedtitle} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% The title of the paper in a different language +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\translatedtitle[2]{\ACM@lang@check{\translatedtitle}% +\g@addto@macro\@translatedtitle{\par\foreignlanguage{#1}{#2}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@translatedsubtitle} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@translatedsubtitle{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\translatedsubtitle} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% The subtitle of the paper in a different language +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\translatedsubtitle[2]{\ACM@lang@check{\translatedsubtitle}% +\g@addto@macro\@translatedsubtitle{\par\foreignlanguage{#1}{#2}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@translatedkeywords} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@translatedkeywords{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\translatedkeywords} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% Add keywords to the paper in the language specified +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\translatedkeywords[2]{\ACM@lang@check{\translatedkeywords}% +\g@addto@macro\@translatedkeywords{\@mktranslatedkeywords{#1}{#2}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@translatedabstracts} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% The container for translated abstracts. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@translatedabstracts{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{translatedabstract} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% We save translated abstracts into \cs{@translatedabstracts} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{translatedabstract}[1]{\Collect@Body + \@savetranslatedabstract\@mktranslatedabstract{#1}}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@savetranslatedabstract} +% And saving the abstract +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@savetranslatedabstract#1{\if@ACM@maketitle@typeset + \ClassError{\@classname}{Abstract must be defined before maketitle + command. Please move it!}\fi + \ACM@lang@check{translatedabstract}% + \g@addto@macro\@translatedabstracts{\bgroup#1\egroup}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Sectioning} +%\label{sec:sectioning} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@startsection} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Added \cs{tochangmeasure}} +% \changes{v2.17}{2025/01/03}{Moved tagging code to the main class} +% Before we call |hyperref|, we redefine \cs{startsection} commands to +% their \LaTeX\ defaults since the |amsart| ones are too AMS-specific. +% We need to do this early since we want |hyperref| to have a chance +% to redefine them again: +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@startsection\@startsection@kernel +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \@tochangmeasure{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi + \@sect@kernel{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[#7]{#8}} +\let\@ssect\@ssect@kernel +\let\@xsect\@xsect@kernel +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname\quad} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@starttoc} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Redefined macro} +% \changes{v1.43}{2017/07/09}{Added \cs{makeatletter}} +% The |amsart| package redefines \cs{startsection}. Here we redefine +% it again to make the table of contents work. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@starttoc#1#2{\begingroup\makeatletter + \setTrue{#1}% + \par\removelastskip\vskip\z@skip + \@startsection{section}\@M\z@{\linespacing\@plus\linespacing}% + {.5\linespacing}{\centering\contentsnamefont}{#2}% + \@input{\jobname.#1}% + \if@filesw + \@xp\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname + \immediate\@xp\openout\csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax + \fi + \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup + \addvspace{32\p@\@plus14\p@}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Redefined macro} +% Section spacing is more generous than for |amsart| +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@section{\@tocline{1}{0pt}{1pc}{2pc}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Redefined macro} +% The spacing in |amsart| is too large +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@subsection{\@tocline{2}{0pt}{1pc}{3pc}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Redefined macro} +% \changes{v1.71}{2020/04/30}{Bug fixed (thanks to Andrew Black)} +% The spacing in |amsart| is too large +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\l@subsubsection{\@tocline{3}{0pt}{1pc}{5pc}{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% We need to define foonote-related stuff before the call to hyperref +% (Ross Moore) +% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext} +% We do not use indentation for footnotes +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@makefntext{\noindent\@makefnmark} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext} +% In |sigchi-a| mode our footnotes are in the margin! +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@sigchiamode +\long\def\@footnotetext#1{\marginpar{% + \reset@font\small + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Made minipage footnotes centered} +% We want the footnotes in minipages centered: +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@mpfootnotetext#1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \color@begingroup\centering + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/067/09}{Redefined} +% AMS classes use a buggy definition of \cs{makefnmark}. We revert +% to the standard one. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Hyperxmp and hyperref} +%\label{sec:hyper} +% +% +% +% +% +% Adding |hyperref| +% \changes{v1.28}{2017/01/07}{Got rid of warnings in pdf keywords} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{Delayed hypersetup since journal options +% may change screen mode} +% \changes{v1.55}{2018/10/20}{Now we use purple color for links} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/26/01}{Suppressed \cs{addtocounter} in pdf +% subject} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% \changes{v1.76}{2021/02/21}{Moved hyperxmp before hyperref, see +% \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/425}} +% \changes{1.92}{2023/10/14}{Moved hyperxmp again due to kernel update} +% \changes{2.04}{2024/03/17}{Explicitly load ifdraft since hyperxmp +% tries to load it inside a group} +% \changes{2.04}{2024/03/31}{Deleted loading ifdraft due to the new +% release of hyperxmp} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@footnotemark@nolink\@footnotemark +\let\@footnotetext@nolink\@footnotetext +\RequirePackage[bookmarksnumbered,unicode]{hyperref} +\RequirePackage{hyperxmp} +\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{% + \def\addtocounter#1#2{}% + \def\unskip{}% + \def\textbullet{- }% + \def\textrightarrow{ -> }% + \def\footnotemark{}% +} +\urlstyle{rm} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog +\or % sigconf +\or % siggraph +\or % sigplan + \urlstyle{sf} +\or % sigchi +\or % sigchi-a + \urlstyle{sf} +\or % acmengage +\or % acmcp +\fi +\AtEndPreamble{% + \if@ACM@urlbreakonhyphens + \def\do@url@hyp{\do\-}% + \fi + \if@ACM@screen + \hypersetup{colorlinks, + linkcolor=ACMPurple, + citecolor=ACMPurple, + urlcolor=ACMDarkBlue, + filecolor=ACMDarkBlue} + \else + \hypersetup{hidelinks} + \fi + \hypersetup{pdflang={en}, + pdfdisplaydoctitle}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Bibliography mangling. +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/23}{Moved \cs{citename} definition for +% non-natbib bibliography, so a package may redefine it} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/23}{\cs{citeyear} no longer behaves like +% \cs{citeyearpar}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@natbib + \let\citeN\cite + \let\cite\citep + \let\citeANP\citeauthor + \let\citeNN\citeyearpar + \let\citeyearNP\citeyear + \let\citeNP\citealt + \DeclareRobustCommand\citeA + {\begingroup\NAT@swafalse + \let\NAT@ctype\@ne\NAT@partrue\NAT@fullfalse\NAT@open\NAT@citetp}% + \providecommand\newblock{}% +\else + \AtBeginDocument{% + \let\shortcite\cite% + \providecommand\citename[1]{#1}} +\fi +\newcommand\shortcite[2][]{% + \ifNAT@numbers\cite[#1]{#2}\else\citeyearpar[#1]{#2}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Redefined macro} +% The |amsart| package redefines \cs{bibliographystyle} since it +% prefers the AMS bibliography style. We turn it back to the +% \LaTeX\ definition: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bibliographystyle#1{% + \ifx\@begindocumenthook\@undefined\else + \expandafter\AtBeginDocument + \fi + {\if@filesw + \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibstyle{#1}}% + \fi}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Other packages} +%\label{sec:packages} +% +% +% +% Graphics and color. +% \changes{1.48}{2017/10/22}{Added prologue option to xcolor} +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{graphicx} +\RequirePackage[prologue]{xcolor} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We define ACM colors according to~\cite{ACMIdentityStandards}: +% \begin{macrocode} +\definecolor[named]{ACMBlue}{cmyk}{1,0.1,0,0.1} +\definecolor[named]{ACMYellow}{cmyk}{0,0.16,1,0} +\definecolor[named]{ACMOrange}{cmyk}{0,0.42,1,0.01} +\definecolor[named]{ACMRed}{cmyk}{0,0.90,0.86,0} +\definecolor[named]{ACMLightBlue}{cmyk}{0.49,0.01,0,0} +\definecolor[named]{ACMGreen}{cmyk}{0.20,0,1,0.19} +\definecolor[named]{ACMPurple}{cmyk}{0.55,1,0,0.15} +\definecolor[named]{ACMDarkBlue}{cmyk}{1,0.58,0,0.21} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Author-draft mode or sigchi-a mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@authordraft + \RequirePackage{draftwatermark} + \SetWatermarkFontSize{0.5in} + \SetWatermarkColor[gray]{.9} + \SetWatermarkText{\parbox{12em}{\centering + Unpublished working draft.\\ + Not for distribution.}} +\else + \if@ACM@sigchiamode + \if@ACM@nonacm\else + \RequirePackage{draftwatermark} + \SetWatermarkFontSize{0.5in} + \SetWatermarkColor[gray]{.9} + \SetWatermarkText{\parbox{12em}{\centering + Legacy document. \\ + Not for publication in an ACM venue}} + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +%\subsection{Paper size and paragraphing} +%\label{sec:paper} +% +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/07}{Slightly decreased margins for sigs} +% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Increased head to 13pt} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/07/15}{Added heightrounded to geometry} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/10/16}{Make two-column layouts flush (Philip Quinn)} +% We use |geometry| for dimensions. Note that the present margins do not +% depend on the font size option---we might need to change this. +% See \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/5#issuecomment-272881329}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{geometry} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript + \geometry{letterpaper,head=13pt, + marginparwidth=6pc,heightrounded}% +\or % acmsmall + \geometry{twoside=true, + includeheadfoot, head=13pt, foot=2pc, + paperwidth=6.75in, paperheight=10in, + top=58pt, bottom=44pt, inner=46pt, outer=46pt, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % acmlarge + \geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, foot=2pc, + paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in, + includeheadfoot, + top=78pt, bottom=114pt, inner=81pt, outer=81pt, + marginparwidth=4pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % acmtog + \geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, foot=2pc, + paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in, + includeheadfoot, columnsep=24pt, + top=52pt, bottom=75pt, inner=52pt, outer=52pt, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % sigconf + \geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, + paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in, + includeheadfoot, columnsep=2pc, + top=57pt, bottom=73pt, inner=54pt, outer=54pt, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % siggraph + \geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, + paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in, + includeheadfoot, columnsep=2pc, + top=57pt, bottom=73pt, inner=54pt, outer=54pt, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % sigplan + \geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, + paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in, + includeheadfoot=false, columnsep=2pc, + top=1in, bottom=1in, inner=0.75in, outer=0.75in, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % sigchi + \geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, + paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in, + includeheadfoot, columnsep=2pc, + top=66pt, bottom=73pt, inner=54pt, outer=54pt, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % sigchi-a + \geometry{twoside=false, head=13pt, + paperwidth=11in, paperheight=8.5in, + includeheadfoot, marginparsep=72pt, + marginparwidth=170pt, columnsep=20pt, + top=72pt, bottom=72pt, left=314pt, right=72pt + }% + \@mparswitchfalse + \reversemarginpar +\or % acmengage + \geometry{twoside=true, head=13pt, + paperwidth=8.5in, paperheight=11in, + includeheadfoot, columnsep=2pc, + top=57pt, bottom=73pt, inner=54pt, outer=54pt, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\or % acmcp + \geometry{twoside=true, + includeheadfoot, head=13pt, foot=2pc, + paperwidth=6.75in, paperheight=10in, + top=58pt, bottom=44pt, inner=46pt, outer=46pt, + marginparwidth=2pc,heightrounded + }% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\parindent} +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% Paragraphing +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\parindent{10\p@} +\setlength\parskip{\z@} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog + \setlength\parindent{9\p@}% +\or % sigconf +\or % siggraph +\or % sigplan +\or % sigchi +\or % sigchi-a +\or % acmengage +\or % acmcp +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\normalparindent} +% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Set \cs{normalparindent} (Matthew Fluet)}% +% The |amsart| package defines the \cs{normalparindent} length and +% initializes it to 12pt (the value of \cs{parindent} in |amsart|). It +% is later used to set the \cs{listparindent} length in the |quotation| +% environment and the \cs{parindent} length in the \cs{@footnotetext} +% command. We set \cs{normalparindent} to the value of \cs{parindent} +% as selected by |acmart| for consistent paragraph indents. +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\normalparindent{\parindent} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% Footnotes require some consideration. We have several layers of +% footnotes: frontmatter footnotes, ``regular'' footnotes and the +% special insert for the bibstrip. In the old ACM classes, the bibstrip +% was a \cs{@float}. The problem with floats is that they tend to, well, +% float---and we want the guarantee they stay. +% +% We use |manyfoot| for layered footnotes instead. +% +% \begin{macro}{\copyrightpermissionfootnoterule} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added macro} +% This is the footnote rule that separates the bibstrip from the rest of +% the paper. It is a full width rule. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\copyrightpermissionfootnoterule{\kern-3\p@ + \hrule \@width \columnwidth \kern 2.6\p@} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{manyfoot} +\SelectFootnoteRule[2]{copyrightpermission} +\DeclareNewFootnote{authorsaddresses} +\SelectFootnoteRule[2]{copyrightpermission} +\DeclareNewFootnote{copyrightpermission} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Made shorter} +% Tschichold's rules: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ + \hrule \@width 4pc \kern 2.6\p@} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\endminipage} +% We do not use footnote rules in minipages +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\endminipage{% + \par + \unskip + \ifvoid\@mpfootins\else + \vskip\skip\@mpfootins + \normalcolor + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \fi + \@minipagefalse + \color@endgroup + \egroup + \expandafter\@iiiparbox\@mpargs{\unvbox\@tempboxa}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@textbottom} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Redefined} +% Add some stretch according to David Carlisle's advice at +% \url{http://tex.stackexchange.com/a/62318/5522} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@textbottom{\vskip \z@ \@plus 1pt} +\let\@texttop\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% In two-column layouts, force both columns to be the same height by inserting +% extra internal vertical space to fill out the page. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog + \flushbottom +\or % sigconf + \flushbottom +\or % siggraph + \flushbottom +\or % sigplan + \flushbottom +\or % sigchi + \flushbottom +\or % sigchi-a +\or % acmengage + \flushbottom +\or % acmcp + \flushbottom +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +%\subsection{Fonts} +%\label{sec:fonts} +% +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added graceful behavior when libertine +% fonts are absent} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added cmap and glyphtounicode} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Added Ross Moore code for glyphtounicode} +% +% Somehow PDFTeX and XeTeX require different incantations to make a PDF +% compliant with the current Acrobat bugs. Xpdf is much better. +% +% The code below is by Ross Moore. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifPDFTeX +\input{glyphtounicode} +\pdfglyphtounicode{f_f}{FB00} +\pdfglyphtounicode{f_f_i}{FB03} +\pdfglyphtounicode{f_f_l}{FB04} +\pdfglyphtounicode{f_i}{FB01} +\pdfglyphtounicode{t_t}{0074 0074} +\pdfglyphtounicode{f_t}{0066 0074} +\pdfglyphtounicode{T_h}{0054 0068} +\pdfgentounicode=1 +\RequirePackage{cmap} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@newfonts} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Added macro}% +% Whether we load the new fonts +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@newfonts +\@ACM@newfontstrue +\IfFileExists{libertine.sty}{}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{You do not + have the libertine package installed. Please upgrade your + TeX}\@ACM@newfontsfalse} +\IfFileExists{zi4.sty}{}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{You do not + have the inconsolata (zi4.sty) package installed. Please upgrade your + TeX}\@ACM@newfontsfalse} +\IfFileExists{newtxmath.sty}{}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{You do not + have the newtxmath package installed. Please upgrade your + TeX}\@ACM@newfontsfalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/15}{Switched to T1: looks like libertine has +% problems with \cs{l} in OT1}% +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/12}{Switched to Type~1 fonts for libertine +% even if OTF-capable engine is used (Kai Mindermann)} +% \changes{v1.51}{2018/04/05}{XeTeX now uses OTF fonts (Joachim +% Breitner)} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/07/16}{XeTeX now uses T1 encoding} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/11/11}{Looks like XeTeX requires explicit +% monotype font declaration} +% \changes{v1.74}{2020/10/25}{Changed the order of font loading}% +% We use Libertine throughout. +% \changes{v2.12}{2024/12/29}{Use unicode-math and libertinus for Unicode engines}% +% \changes{v2.13}{2025/01/11}{Added mathcal in unicode mode}% +% \changes{v2.13}{2025/01/11}{Added mathcal in unicode mode}% +% \changes{v2.15}{2025/08/21}{Added symbols in unicode mode}% +% We use Libertine throughout. +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@newfonts + \ifxetex + \RequirePackage{amssymb} + \RequirePackage{unicode-math} + \setmathfont[Scale=MatchUppercase]{LibertinusMath-Regular.otf} + \setmathfont{latinmodern-math.otf}[range={cal}] + \RequirePackage[tt=false]{libertine} + \setmonofont[StylisticSet=3]{inconsolata} + \else + \ifluatex + \RequirePackage{amssymb} + \RequirePackage{unicode-math} + \setmathfont[Scale=MatchUppercase]{LibertinusMath-Regular.otf} + \setmathfont{latinmodern-math.otf}[range={cal}] + \RequirePackage[tt=false]{libertine} + \setmonofont[StylisticSet=3]{inconsolata} + \else + \RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc} + \RequirePackage[tt=false, type1=true]{libertine} + \RequirePackage[varqu]{zi4} + \RequirePackage[libertine]{newtxmath} + \fi + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\liningnums} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Workaround for compatibility with fontspec} +% Libertine defines \cs{liningnums}, which makes |fontspec| unhappy. +% While we do not use |fontspec|, some users do. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\liningnums\@undefined +\AtEndPreamble{% + \DeclareTextFontCommand{\liningnums}{\libertineLF}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% The SIGCHI extended abstracts are sans serif: +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@sigchiamode + \renewcommand{\familydefault}{\sfdefault} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/31}{Added pifont} +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{pifont} +% \end{macrocode} +% +%\subsection{Image descriptions} +%\label{sec:description} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@Description@present} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/11/11}{Added macro} +% A local switch: whether there is a description in the given figure +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@Description@present +\@Description@presenttrue +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@undescribed@images} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/11/11}{Added macro} +% A global switch whether some images were \emph{not} described +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@undescribed@images +\@undescribed@imagesfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\Description} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/11/11}{Added macro} +% The Description macro right now just sets switches +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\Description[2][]{\global\@Description@presenttrue\ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% The global warning +% \changes{v2.13}{2025/01/11}{New warnings about lack of descriptions} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/03/03}{Switched off warning in tagged mode} +% \begin{macrocode} +\IfDocumentMetadataF{% +\AtEndDocument{\if@undescribed@images + \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{Some images may lack + descriptions.\MessageBreak + ACM is committed to complying with the upcoming US ADA + https://accessiblyapp.com/accessibility-compliance/ada/ and European + Accessibility Act + (EAA) https://accessiblyapp.com/accessibility-compliance/eaa/ + regulations by actively working to ensure our publications and + application services are accessible to individuals with + disabilities, adhering to the WCAG guidelines to provide a seamless + experience for all users, and regularly reviewing our accessibility + practices to maintain compliance with evolving standards. \MessageBreak + To this end, we strongly encourage our authors to provide + alternative text and captions for images and multimedia content. It + is also important to optimize color contrast for the visually + impaired. Taking these important steps when creating your papers + will ensure that the widest possible audience can ingest your + work.}\fi} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Hooks for figures and tables. We also patch |algorithm| and +% |algorithm*| in case somebody uses them. +% \changes{v1.66}{2019/11/23}{Patching algorithm and algorithm* +% to prevent spurious space warnings} +% \changes{v1.67}{2020/01/11}{Patching lstlisting and lstlisting* +% to prevent spurious space warnings} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/08/23}{Patching minted and minted* +% to prevent spurious space warnings} +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginEnvironment{figure}{\@Description@presentfalse + \let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{figure*}{\@Description@presentfalse + \let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtEndEnvironment{figure}{\if@Description@present\else + \global\@undescribed@imagestrue + \ClassWarning{\@classname}{A possible image without description}\fi} +\AtEndEnvironment{figure*}{\if@Description@present\else + \global\@undescribed@imagestrue + \ClassWarning{\@classname}{A possible image without description}\fi} +\AtBeginEnvironment{table}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{table*}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{algorithm}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{algorithm*}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{lstlisting}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{lstlisting*}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{minted}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{minted*}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{listing}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{listing*}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{lstinputlisting}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} +\AtBeginEnvironment{lstinputlisting*}{\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig} + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +%\subsection{Floats} +%\label{sec:floats} +% +% \changes{v1.55}{2018/10/20}{Table captions for SIGCHI now use the +% same font size as figure captions (Luis Leiva)} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/03/02}{Rewrote caption code for tagging} +% We use |caption| package +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{caption, float} +\captionsetup[table]{position=top} +\if@ACM@journal + \captionsetup{labelfont={sf, small}, + textfont={sf, small}, margin=\z@} + \captionsetup[figure]{name={Fig.}} +\else + \captionsetup{labelfont={bf}, + textfont={bf}, labelsep=colon, margin=\z@} + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \or % acmsmall + \or % acmlarge + \or % acmtog + \or % sigconf + \or % siggraph + \captionsetup{textfont={it}} + \or % sigplan + \captionsetup{labelfont={bf}, + textfont={normalfont}, labelsep=period, margin=\z@} + \or % sigchi + \captionsetup[figure]{labelfont={bf, small}, + textfont={bf, small}} + \captionsetup[table]{labelfont={bf, small}, + textfont={bf, small}} + \or % sigchi-a + \captionsetup[figure]{labelfont={bf, small}, + textfont={bf, small}} + \captionsetup[table]{labelfont={bf, small}, + textfont={bf, small}} + \or % acmengage + \or % acmcp + \fi +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/03/10}{New code for captions} +% Unfortinately |caption| package so far is not tagging compatible. +% So we need to recreate it if tagging is enabled. This is from +% https://github.com/latex3/tagging-project/issues/720 +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExplSyntaxOn +\IfDocumentMetadataT{% + \RemoveFromHook{begindocument}[latex-lab-testphase-float] + \socket_new_plug:nnn{tagsupport/parbox/before}{caption} + { + \tagpdfparaOn %restart para tagging + \tl_if_empty:NTF\@current@float@struct + { + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Caption,firstkid} + } + { + \tag_struct_begin:n{tag=Caption,parent=\@current@float@struct,firstkid} + } + } + \socket_new_plug:nnn{tagsupport/parbox/after}{caption} + { + \tag_struct_end: + } + \l@addto@macro\caption@beginex@hook{% + \tagpdfparaOff %leavevmode in parbox should not start paragraph structure + \AssignSocketPlug{tagsupport/parbox/before}{caption} + \AssignSocketPlug{tagsupport/parbox/after}{caption}} +} +\ExplSyntaxOff +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v1.19}{2026-06-27}{Tagging code for tables} +% By default the first row of a table contains headers +% \begin{macrocode} +\IfDocumentMetadataT{% + \tagpdfsetup{table/header-rows={1}} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{sidebar} +% The |sidebar| environment: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newfloat{sidebar}{}{sbar} +\floatname{sidebar}{Sidebar} +\renewenvironment{sidebar}{\Collect@Body\@sidebar}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@sidebar} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Deleted spurious \cs{vspace} warning} +% The processing of the saved text +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@sidebar#1{\bgroup\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig\captionsetup{type=sidebar}% + \marginpar{\small#1}\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{marginfigure} +% The |marginfigure| environment: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{marginfigure}{\Collect@Body\@marginfigure}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@marginfigure} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Now centering by default} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/11/11}{Added checking for description} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Deleted spurious \cs{vspace} warning} +% The processing of the saved text +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@marginfigure#1{\bgroup + \let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig + \captionsetup{type=figure}% + \marginpar{\@Description@presentfalse\centering + \small#1\if@Description@present\else + \global\@undescribed@imagestrue + \ClassWarning{\@classname}{A possible image without description} + \fi}% + \egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{margintable} +% The |margintable| environment: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{margintable}{\Collect@Body\@margintable}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@margintable} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Now centering by default} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Deleted spurious \cs{vspace} warning} +% The processing of the saved text +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@margintable#1{\bgroup\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig\captionsetup{type=table}% + \marginpar{\centering\small#1}\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% SIGCHI extended abstracts provide an interesting possibility to push +% into the margin. Here we use |figure*| and |table*| for this. +% \begin{macro}{\fulltextwidth} +% We define the width of the boxes as +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\fulltextwidth +\fulltextwidth=\dimexpr(\textwidth+\marginparwidth+\marginparsep) +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@dblfloat} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Deleted spurious \cs{vspace} warning} +% We redefine the double-float command. First, we make the size +% bigger. Second, our default position is going to be |tp| (to give +% marginalia a chance) +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@sigchiamode +\def\@dblfloat{\bgroup\let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig\columnwidth=\fulltextwidth + \let\@endfloatbox\@endwidefloatbox + \def\@fpsadddefault{\def\@fps{tp}}% + \@float} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\end@dblfloat} +% And the end. Just adding a \cs{bgroup}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@sigchiamode +\def\end@dblfloat{% + \end@float\egroup} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@endwidefloatbox} +% This is the end of a wide box---we basically move everything +% to the left +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@endwidefloatbox{% + \par\vskip\z@skip + \@minipagefalse + \outer@nobreak + \egroup + \color@endbox + \global\setbox\@currbox=\vbox{\moveleft + \dimexpr(\fulltextwidth-\textwidth)\box\@currbox}% + \wd\@currbox=\textwidth +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Lists} +%\label{sec:lists} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog +\or % sigconf +\or % siggraph +\or % sigplan +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.} +\def\labelenumii{\theenumii.} +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.} +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.} +\or % sigchi +\or % sigchi-a +\or % acmengage +\or % acmcp +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Reduce list indentation (Matthew Fluet)}% +% The AMS uses generous margins for lists. Note that |amsart| defines +% \cs{leftmargin} values for list levels at the beginning of the +% document, so we must redefine them in the same manner. Also, note that +% |amsart| redefines the |enumerate| and |itemize| environments with a +% \cs{makelabel} command that uses \cs{llap}, so the \cs{labelwidth} +% value is~(effectively) irrelevant; nonetheless, we follow |amsart| +% and set \cs{labelwidth} to \cs{leftmargin} minus \cs{labelsep}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\@ACM@labelwidth +\AtBeginDocument{% + \setlength\labelsep{4pt} + \setlength{\@ACM@labelwidth}{6.5pt} + + %% First-level list: when beginning after the first line of an + %% indented paragraph or ending before an indented paragraph, labels + %% should not hang to the left of the preceding/following text. + \setlength\leftmargini{\z@} + \addtolength\leftmargini{\parindent} + \addtolength\leftmargini{2\labelsep} + \addtolength\leftmargini{\@ACM@labelwidth} + + %% Second-level and higher lists. + \setlength\leftmarginii{\z@} + \addtolength\leftmarginii{0.5\labelsep} + \addtolength\leftmarginii{\@ACM@labelwidth} + \setlength\leftmarginiii{\leftmarginii} + \setlength\leftmarginiv{\leftmarginiii} + \setlength\leftmarginv{\leftmarginiv} + \setlength\leftmarginvi{\leftmarginv} + \@listi} +\newskip\listisep +\listisep\smallskipamount +\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini + \labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep + \listparindent\z@ + \topsep\listisep} +\let\@listi\@listI +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii + \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep + \topsep\z@skip} +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii + \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep} +\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv + \labelwidth\leftmarginiv \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep} +\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv + \labelwidth\leftmarginv \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep} +\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi + \labelwidth\leftmarginvi \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\descriptionlabel} +% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Reduce list indentation (Matthew Fluet)}% +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Redefined} +% We do not use a colon by default like |amsart| does: +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\upshape\bfseries #1} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\description} +% \changes{v1.37}{2017/05/13}{Reduce list indentation (Matthew Fluet)}% +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/07}{Decreased indent} +% Make the |description| environment indentation consistent with that of +% the |itemize| and |enumerate| environments. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewenvironment{description}{\list{}{% + \labelwidth\@ACM@labelwidth + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}% +}{ + \endlist +} +\let\enddescription=\endlist % for efficiency +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Top-matter data} +%\label{sec:top_matter_data} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@maketitle@typeset} +% \changes{v1.64}{2019/08/17}{Introduced macro} +% The switch to check whether \cs{maketitle} is already typeset. It +% is initally false, and setting top matter when it is true is wrong. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@maketitle@typeset +\@ACM@maketitle@typesetfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.24}{2016/11/16}{Add IMWUT journal option} +% \changes{v1.25}{2016/12/03}{Updated PACMPL} +% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/15}{Updated IMWUT and PACMPL} +% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/13}{Added PACMHCI journal options} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{PACM now set screen to true} +% \changes{v1.53}{2018/04/14}{Added PACMCGIT, TIOT, TDSCI} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/03/29}{Added HEALTH. TDSCI is renamed to TDS} +% \changes{1.70}{2020/02/22}{Name change for TDS} +% \changes{1.79}{2021/08/29}{Updated indormation for TAP, TCPS, TEAC} +% \changes{1.80}{2021/09/24}{Added DLT and FAC} +% \changes{1.82}{2022/02/05}{Updated abbreviations and codes for +% several journals} +% \changes{1.84}{2022/04/09}{New journals: JDS, GAMES} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{New journal: JRC} +% \changes{1.87}{2022/10/18}{New journals: ACMJCSS, JATS, TORS} +% \changes{1.88}{2022/10/19}{Added ISSN for GAMES} +% \changes{1.88}{2022/10/23}{Added ISSN for ACMJCSS} +% \changes{1.88}{2022/10/24}{Added PACMNET} +% \changes{1.89}{2023/03/25}{Added PACMMOD} +% \changes{1.89}{2023/03/25}{Added TOPML} +% \changes{1.90}{2023/03/30}{Added TOPML eISSN} +% \changes{2.05}{2024/04/04}{New data for TELO} +% \changes{2.06}{2024/04/13}{Added eISSN for a number of journals} +% \changes{2.07}{2024/04/17}{Another change for TELO} +% \changes{2.15}{2025/08/21}{Added AILET, TAIS, TAISAP, ACMJDS} +% \changes{2.16}{2025/08/27}{Corrected handling of journals in the +% options} +% \changes{2.17}{2026/03/28}{Fixed bug with ACMJDS} +% +% We use the |xkeyval| interface to define journal titles and the relevant +% information +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@choicekey*+{ACM}{acmJournal}[\@journalCode\@journalCode@nr]{% + ACMJCSS,% + ACMJDS,% + AILET,% + CIE,% + CSUR,% + DGOV,% + DLT,% + DTRAP,% + FAC,% + GAMES,% + HEALTH,% + IMWUT,% + JACM,% + JATS,% + JDIQ,% + JDS,% + JEA,% + JERIC,% + JETC,% + JOCCH,% + JRC,% + PACMCGIT,% + PACMHCI,% + PACMMOD,% + PACMNET,% + PACMPL,% + PACMSE,% + POMACS,% + TAAS,% + TACCESS,% + TACO,% + TAIS,% + TAISAP,% + TALG,% + TALLIP,% + TAP,% + TCPS,% + TDS,% + TEAC,% + TECS,% + TELO,% + THRI,% + TIIS,% + TIOT,% + TISSEC,% + TIST,% + TKDD,% + TMIS,% + TOCE,% + TOCHI,% + TOCL,% + TOCS,% + TOCT,% + TODAES,% + TODS,% + TOG,% + TOIS,% + TOIT,% + TOMACS,% + TOMM,% + TOMPECS,% + TOMS,% + TOPC,% + TOPLAS,% + TOPML,% + TOPS,% + TORS,% + TOS,% + TOSEM,% + TOSN,% + TQC,% + TRETS,% + TSAS,% + TSC,% + TSLP,% + TWEB,% + FACMP% +}{% +\ifcase\@journalCode@nr +\relax % ACMJCSS + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal on Computing and Sustainable Societies}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Comput. Sustain. Soc.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2834-5533}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2834-5533}% +\or % ACMJDS + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Data Science}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Data Sci.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{3069-3497}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{3069-3497}% +\or % AILET + \def\@journalName{ACM AI Letters}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM AI Lett.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{3068-8590}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{3068-8590}% +\or % CIE + \def\@journalName{ACM Computers in Entertainment}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Comput. Entertain.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1544-3574}% +\or % CSUR + \def\@journalName{ACM Computing Surveys}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Comput. Surv.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0360-0300}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-7341}% +\or % DGOV + \def\@journalName{Digital Government: Research and Practice}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Digit. Gov. Res. Pract.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2639-0175}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2639-0175}% +\or % DLT + \def\@journalName{Distributed Ledger Technologies: Research and Practice}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Distrib. Ledger Technol.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2769-6472}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2769-6480}% +\or % DTRAP + \def\@journalName{Digital Threats: Research and Practice}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Digit. Threat. Res. Pract.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2576-5337}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2576-5337}% +\or % FAC + \def\@journalName{Formal Aspects of Computing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Form. Asp. Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0934-5043}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1433-299X}% +\or % GAMES + \def\@journalName{ACM Games: Research and Practice}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Games}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2832-5516}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2832-5516}% +\or % HEALTH + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computing for Healthcare}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Healthcare}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2637-8051}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2637-8051}% +\or % IMWUT + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Interactive, Mobile, + Wearable and Ubiquitous Technologies}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Interact. Mob. Wearable Ubiquitous Technol.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2474-9567}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2474-9567}% + \@ACM@screentrue + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}% +\or % JACM + \def\@journalName{Journal of the ACM}% + \def\@journalNameShort{J. ACM}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0004-5411}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-735X}% +\or % JATS + \def\@journalName{Journal on Autonomous Transportation Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Auton. Transport. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2833-0528}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2833-0528}% +\or % JDIQ + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Data and Information Quality}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Data Inform. Quality}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1936-1955}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1936-1963}% +\or % JDS + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Data Science}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Data Sci.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2831-3194}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2831-3194}% +\or % JEA + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Experimental Algorithmics}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Exp. Algor.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1084-6654}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1084-6654}% +\or % JERIC + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal of Educational Resources in Computing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Edu. Resources in Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1073-0516}% +\or % JETC + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Emerg. Technol. Comput. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1550-4832}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1550-4840}% +\or % JOCCH + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal on Computing and Cultural Heritage}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Comput. Cult. Herit.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1556-4673}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1556-4711}% +\or % JRC + \def\@journalName{ACM Journal on Responsible Computing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM J. Responsib. Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2832-0565}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2832-0565}% +\or % PACMCGIT + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Computer Graphics and Interactive Techniques}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Comput. Graph. Interact. Tech.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2577-6193}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2577-6193}% + \@ACM@screentrue + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}% +\or % PACMHCI + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Human-Computer Interaction}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Hum.-Comput. Interact.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2573-0142}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2573-0142}% + \@ACM@screentrue + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}% +\or % PACMMOD + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Management of Data}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Manag. Data}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2836-6573}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2836-6573}% +\or % PACMNET + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Networkng}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Netw.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2834-5509}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2834-5509}% +\or % PACMPL + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Programming Languages}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Program. Lang.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2475-1421}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2475-1421}% + \@ACM@screentrue + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}% +\or % PACMSE + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Software Engineering}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Softw. Eng.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2994-970X}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2994-970X}% + \@ACM@screentrue + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}% +\or % POMACS + \def\@journalName{Proceedings of the ACM on Measurement and Analysis of Computing Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{Proc. ACM Meas. Anal. Comput. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2476-1249}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2476-1249}% + \@ACM@screentrue + \PackageInfo{\@classname}{Using screen mode due to \@journalCode}% +\or % TAAS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Autonomous and Adaptive Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Autonom. Adapt. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1556-4665}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1556-4703}% +\or % TACCESS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Accessible Computing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Access. Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1936-7228}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1936-7236}% +\or % TACO + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Architecture and Code Optimization}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Arch. Code Optim.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1544-3566}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1544-3973}% +\or % TAIS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on AI for Science}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. AI Sci.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{3066-4438}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{3066-4438}% +\or % TAISAP + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on AI Security and Privacy}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. AI Secur. Priv.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{3068-3564}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{3068-3564}% +\or % TALG + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Algorithms}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Algor.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1549-6325}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1549-6333}% +\or % TALLIP + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Asian and Low-Resource Language Information Processing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Asian Low-Resour. Lang. Inf. Process.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2375-4699}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2375-4702}% +\or % TAP + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Applied Perception}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Appl. Percept.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1544-3558}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1544-3965}% +\or % TCPS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Cyber-Physical Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Cyber-Phys. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2378-962X}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2378-9638}% +\or % TDS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Data Science}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Data Sci.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2577-3224}% +\or % TEAC + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Economics and Computation}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Econ. Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2167-8375}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2167-8383}% +\or % TECS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Embedded Computing Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Embedd. Comput. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1539-9087}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1558-3465}% +\or % TELO + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Evolutionary Learning and Optimization}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Evol. Learn. Optim.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2688-299X}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2688-3007}% +\or % THRI + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Human-Robot Interaction}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Hum.-Robot Interact.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2573-9522}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2573-9522}% +\or % TIIS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Interactive Intelligent Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Interact. Intell. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2160-6455}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2160-6463}% +\or % TIOT + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Internet of Things}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Internet Things}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2577-6207}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2577-6207}% +\or % TISSEC + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Information and System Security}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Info. Syst. Sec.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1094-9224}% +\or % TIST + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Intelligent Systems and Technology}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Intell. Syst. Technol.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2157-6904}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2157-6912}% +\or % TKDD + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Knowledge Discovery from Data}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Knowl. Discov. Data.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1556-4681}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1556-472X}% +\or % TMIS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Management Information Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Manag. Inform. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2158-656X}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2158-6578}% +\or % TOCE + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computing Education}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Educ.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1946-6226}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1946-6226}% +\or % TOCHI + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computer-Human Interaction}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput.-Hum. Interact.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1073-0516}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-7325}% +\or % TOCL + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computational Logic}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Logic}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1529-3785}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-945X}% +\or % TOCS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computer Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0734-2071}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-7333}% +\or % TOCT + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Computation Theory}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Comput. Theory}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1942-3454}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1942-3462}% +\or % TODAES + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Design Automation of Electronic Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Des. Autom. Electron. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1084-4309}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-7309}% +\or % TODS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Database Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Datab. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0362-5915}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-4644}% +\or % TOG + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Graphics}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Graph.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0730-0301}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-7368}% +\or % TOIS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Information Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Inf. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1046-8188}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1558-2868}% +\or % TOIT + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Internet Technology}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Internet Technol.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1533-5399}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-6051}% +\or % TOMACS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Modeling and Computer Simulation}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Model. Comput. Simul.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1049-3301}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1558-1195}% +\or % TOMM + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Multimedia Computing, Communications and Applications}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Multimedia Comput. Commun. Appl.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1551-6857}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1551-6865}% +\or % TOMPECS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Modeling and Performance Evaluation of Computing Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Model. Perform. Eval. Comput. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2376-3639}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2376-3647}% +\or % TOMS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Math. Softw.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0098-3500}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-7295}% +\or % TOPC + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Parallel Computing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Parallel Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2329-4949}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2329-4957}% +\or % TOPLAS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Program. Lang. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{0164-0925}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1558-4593}% +\or % TOPML + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Probabilistic Machine Learning}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Probab. Mach. Learn.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2836-8924}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2836-8924}% +\or % TOPS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Privacy and Security}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Priv. Sec.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2471-2566}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2471-2574}% +\or % TORS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Recommender Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Recomm. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2770-6699}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2770-6699}% +\or % TOS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Storage}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Storage}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1553-3077}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1553-3093}% +\or % TOSEM + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Software Engineering and Methodology}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Softw. Eng. Methodol.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1049-331X}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1557-7392}% +\or % TOSN + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Sensor Networks}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Sensor Netw.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1550-4859}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1550-4867}% +\or % TQC + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Quantum Computing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Quantum Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2643-6817}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2643-6817}% +\or % TRETS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Reconfigurable Technology and Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Reconfig. Technol. Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1936-7406}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1936-7414}% +\or % TSAS + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Spatial Algorithms and Systems}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Spatial Algorithms Syst.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2374-0353}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2374-0361}% +\or % TSC + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Social Computing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Soc. Comput.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{2469-7818}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2469-7826}% +\or % TSLP + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on Speech and Language Processing}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Speech Lang. Process.}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1550-4875}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{2329-9304}% +\or % TWEB + \def\@journalName{ACM Transactions on the Web}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Trans. Web}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{1559-1131}% + \def\@permissionCodeTwo{1559-114X}% +\else % FACMP, a dummy journal + \def\@journalName{ACM Just Accepted}% + \def\@journalNameShort{ACM Accepted}% + \def\@permissionCodeOne{XXXX-XXXX}% +\fi +\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Using journal code \@journalCode}% +}{% + \ClassError{\@classname}{Incorrect journal #1}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\acmJournal} +% \changes{v1.59}{2019/04/20}{Setting \cs{@ACM@journal@bibstrip}} +% And the syntactic sugar around it +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmJournal#1{\setkeys{ACM}{acmJournal=#1}% + \global\@ACM@journal@bibstriptrue + \global\@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@togtrue} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% The defaults: +% \changes{v2.04}{2024/03/17}{eISSN is printed, rather than pSSN} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@journalCode@nr{0} +\def\@journalName{}% +\def\@journalNameShort{\@journalName}% +\def\@permissionCodeOne{XXXX-XXXX}% +\def\@permissionCodeTwo{\@permissionCodeOne}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmConference} +% \changes{v1.59}{2019/04/20}{Setting \cs{@ACM@journal@bibstrip}} +% \changes{v2.02}{2024/01/06}{Moved here setting the conference title +% for bibstrip} +% \changes{v2.03}{2024/02/04}{Made setting bibstrip overriding journal} +% \changes{v2.20}{2026/08/12}{Proceedings headers, footers and folios +% for acmsmall used for conference proceedings} +% This is the conference command. The |acmsmall| format is used both +% for journals and for conference proceedings published as books. In +% the latter case the paper has no journal name, volume, issue or +% article number, so we switch it to the headers and footers of the +% proceedings formats, and suppress the folios like these formats do: +% the page numbers of such a paper are assigned by the proceedings +% rather than by the article. An author who wants the folios can say +% \cs{settopmatter}|{printfolios=true}| after \cs{acmConference}. +% The |acmtog| format keeps its own conference headers and footers: +% there a conference paper is published as a journal issue and does +% have an article number. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\acmConference[4][]{% + \gdef\acmConference@shortname{#1}% + \gdef\acmConference@name{#2}% + \gdef\acmConference@date{#3}% + \gdef\acmConference@venue{#4}% + \ifx\acmConference@shortname\@empty + \gdef\acmConference@shortname{#2}% + \fi + \global\@ACM@journal@bibstripfalse + \ifnum\ACM@format@nr=1\relax % acmsmall + \global\@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@togfalse + \settopmatter{printfolios=false}% + \fi + \ifx\@acmBooktitle\@empty\relax + \acmBooktitle{Proceedings of \acmConference@name + \ifx\acmConference@name\acmConference@shortname\else + \ (\acmConference@shortname)\fi}% + \fi +} +\if@ACM@journal\else +\acmConference[Conference'17]{ACM Conference}{July 2017}{Washington, + DC, USA}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmBooktitle} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro} +% \changes{v2.01}{2024/01/06}{Moved default conference title to +% conference setting} +% \begin{macro}{\@acmBooktitle} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro} +% The book title of the conference: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmBooktitle#1{\gdef\@acmBooktitle{#1}} +\acmBooktitle{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@editorsAbbrev} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro} +% How to abbreviate editors +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@editorsAbbrev{(Ed.)} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmEditors} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro} +% The list of editors +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmEditors{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\editor} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Added macro} +% Add a new editor to the list +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\editor#1{\ifx\@acmEditors\@empty + \gdef\@acmEditors{#1}% + \else + \gdef\@editorsAbbrev{(Eds.)}% + \g@addto@macro\@acmEditors{\and#1}% +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\subtitle} +% The subtitle macro +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\subtitle#1{\def\@subtitle{#1}} +\subtitle{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\num@authorgroups} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Renamed} +% The total number of ``groups''. Each group is several authors with +% the same affiliations(s) +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcount\num@authorgroups +\num@authorgroups=0\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\num@authors} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Introduced macro} +% The total number of authors +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcount\num@authors +\num@authors=0\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@insideauthorgroup} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Introduced macro} +% Whether we are continuing an author group +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@insideauthorgroup +\@insideauthorgroupfalse +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\author} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Added code for author groups} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Started counting authors} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/06/23}{Added submission id in anonymous mode} +% \changes{v1.57}{2018/12/09}{Added warning if \cs{author} has comma} +% \changes{v1.72}{2020/05/04}{Added \cs{detokenize} (Kuldeep S. Meel)} +% \changes{v1.76}{2021/03/15}{Added code for orcid links} +% Adding an author to the list of authors and addresses. +% +% Note that we want to typeset the link to the author's orcid if +% known. The problem is, we know the orcid only after the author is +% entered. The trick is based on the idea that |\csname...\endcsname| +% is \cs{relax} unless defined. Therefore we typeset authors by the +% special macro |\csname typeset@author\the\num@authors\endcsname|, +% which is defined by \cs{orcid} command. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\author[2][]{% + \IfSubStr{\detokenize{#2}}{,}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{Do not put several + authors in the same \string\author\space macro!}}{}% + \global\advance\num@authors by 1\relax + \if@insideauthorgroup\else + \global\advance\num@authorgroups by 1\relax + \global\@insideauthorgrouptrue + \fi + \ifx\addresses\@empty + \if@ACM@anonymous + \gdef\addresses{\@author{Anonymous Author(s)% + \ifx\@acmSubmissionID\@empty\else\\Submission Id: + \@acmSubmissionID\fi}}% + \gdef\authors{Anonymous Author(s)}% + \else + \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\addresses\expandafter{% + \expandafter\@author\expandafter{% + \csname typeset@author\the\num@authors\endcsname{#2}}}% + \gdef\authors{#2}% + \fi + \else + \if@ACM@anonymous\else + \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\addresses\expandafter{% + \expandafter\and\expandafter\@author\expandafter{% + \csname typeset@author\the\num@authors\endcsname{#2}}}% + \g@addto@macro\authors{\and#2}% + \fi + \fi + \if@ACM@anonymous + \ifx\shortauthors\@empty + \gdef\shortauthors{Anon. + \ifx\@acmSubmissionID\@empty\else Submission Id: + \@acmSubmissionID\fi}% + \fi + \else + \def\@tempa{#1}% + \ifx\@tempa\@empty + \ifx\shortauthors\@empty + \gdef\shortauthors{#2}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\shortauthors{\and#2}% + \fi + \else + \ifx\shortauthors\@empty + \gdef\shortauthors{#1}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\shortauthors{\and#1}% + \fi + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\affiliation} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Added code for author groups} +% The macro \cs{affiliation} mimics \cs{address} from |amsart|. +% Note that it has an optional argument, which we use differently +% from |amsart|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\affiliation}[2][]{% + \global\@insideauthorgroupfalse + \if@ACM@anonymous\else + \g@addto@macro\addresses{\affiliation{#1}{#2}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added macro} +% Whether to use the author's punctuation (false by default, which adds +% American-style address punctuation) +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{@ACM@affiliation@}[@ACM@affiliation@]{obeypunctuation}% +[true]{}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option obeypunctuation can be either true or false}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\additionalaffiliation} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Added macro} +% Additional affiliations go to footnotes +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\additionalaffiliation#1{\authornote{\@additionalaffiliation{#1}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@additionalaffiliation} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Added macro} +% Process \cs{additionalaffiliation} inside \cs{authornote} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@additionalaffiliation#1{\bgroup + \def\position##1{\ignorespaces}% + \def\institution##1{##1\ignorespaces}% + \def\department{\@ifnextchar[{\@department}{\@department[]}}% + \def\@department[##1]##2{, ##2 \ignorespaces}% + \let\city\position + \let\state\position + \let\country\position + Also with #1\unskip.\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\email} +% \changes{v1.57}{2018/12/09}{Added warning if \cs{author} has comma} +% The macro \cs{email} mimics \cs{email} from |amsart|. +% Again, it has an optional argument that we do not currently need +% but keep for possible future use. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\email}[2][]{% + \IfSubStr{#2}{,}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{Do not put several + addresses in the same \string\email\space macro!}}{}% + \if@ACM@anonymous\else + \g@addto@macro\addresses{\email{#1}{#2}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\orcid} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/06/25}{Introduced macro} +% \changes{v1.76}{2021/03/15}{Added code for orcid links} +% \changes{2.13}{2025/01/15}{Protected orchidcite against uppercasing} +% We redefine the command to typeset the current author +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\orcid#1{\unskip\ignorespaces% + \protected\def\orcidsite{https://orcid.org/}% + \IfBeginWith{#1}{http}{% + \expandafter\gdef\csname + typeset@author\the\num@authors\endcsname##1{% + \href{#1}{##1}}}{% + \expandafter\gdef\csname + typeset@author\the\num@authors\endcsname##1{% + \href{\orcidsite#1}{##1}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\authorsaddresses} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Introduced macro} +% Setting up authors' addresses +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\authorsaddresses#1{\def\@authorsaddresses{#1}} +\authorsaddresses{\@mkauthorsaddresses} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mktranslatedkeywords} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% We have two argument: the language to typeset keywords and the +% keywords. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\@mktranslatedkeywords[2]{\bgroup + \selectlanguage{#1}% + {\@specialsection{\keywordsname}% + \noindent#2\par}\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@titlenotes} +% The title notes +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@titlenotes{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\titlenote} +% Adding a note to the title +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\titlenote#1{% + \g@addto@macro\@title{\footnotemark}% + \if@ACM@anonymous + \g@addto@macro\@titlenotes{% + \stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{Title note}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@titlenotes{\stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{#1}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@subtitlenotes} +% The subtitle notes +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@subtitlenotes{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\subtitlenote} +% Adding a note to the subtitle +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\subtitlenote#1{% + \g@addto@macro\@subtitle{\footnotemark}% + \if@ACM@anonymous + \g@addto@macro\@subtitlenotes{% + \stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{Subtitle note}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@subtitlenotes{% + \stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{#1}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@authornotes} +% The author notes +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@authornotes{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\authornote} +% Adding a note to the author +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\authornote#1{% + \if@ACM@anonymous\else + \g@addto@macro\addresses{\@authornotemark}% + \g@addto@macro\@authornotes{% + \stepcounter{footnote}\footnotetext{#1}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\correspondingauthor} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/31}{Added macro} +% Mark the author as corresponding author +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\correspondingauthor{% + \if@ACM@anonymous\else + \g@addto@macro\addresses{\@correspondingauthormark}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@correspondingauthormark} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/31}{Added macro} +% Print the envelope +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@correspondingauthormark{\g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{% + \advance\hfuzz by 5pt\relax\textsuperscript{\ding{41}}\relax}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\authornotemark} +% \changes{v1.39}{2017/05/14}{Added macro} +% Adding a footnote mark to the authors +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\authornotemark[1][\relax]{% + \if@ACM@anonymous\else + \ifx#1\relax\relax\relax + \g@addto@macro\addresses{\@authornotemark}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\addresses{\@@authornotemark{#1}}% + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmVolume} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical} +% The current volume +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmVolume#1{\def\@acmVolume{#1}} +\acmVolume{1} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmNumber} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical} +% The current number +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmNumber#1{\def\@acmNumber{#1}} +\acmNumber{1} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmArticle} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/111}{The default is now empty} +% The current article +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmArticle#1{\def\@acmArticle{#1}} +\acmArticle{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmArticleSeq} +% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Name change by Matthew Fluet} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Now acmArticle might be empty} +% The sequence number +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmArticleSeq#1{\def\@acmArticleSeq{#1}} +\acmArticleSeq{\@acmArticle} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmYear} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{The default is now numerical} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{The default now is the current year +% (Matteo Riondato)} +% The current year +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmYear#1{\def\@acmYear{#1}} +\acmYear{\the\year} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmMonth} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/09}{The default must be numerical. Closes \#50.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{The default now is the current month +% (Matteo Riondato)} +% The current month +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmMonth#1{\def\@acmMonth{#1}} +\acmMonth{\the\month} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmPubDate} +% The publication date +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmPubDate{\ifcase\@acmMonth\or + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or + December\fi~\@acmYear} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmPrice} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Deleted macro} +% \changes{v2.01}{2023/12/29}{Now the macro produces a warning} +% The price---obsolete +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmPrice#1{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{The macro \string\acmPrice + is obsolete. ACM no longer prints the price in bibstrip.}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmSubmissionID} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added macro} +% The submission ID +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmSubmissionID#1{\def\@acmSubmissionID{#1}} +\acmSubmissionID{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmISBN} +% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Name change by Matthew Fluet} +% The book ISBN +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmISBN#1{\def\@acmISBN{#1}} +\acmISBN{978-x-xxxx-xxxx-x/YYYY/MM} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmDOI} +% \changes{v1.04}{2016/04/26}{Name change by Matthew Fluet} +% The paper DOI +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmDOI#1{\def\@acmDOI{#1}} +\acmDOI{10.1145/nnnnnnn.nnnnnnn} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@badge} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Deleted macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@badge@width} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% The width of the badge +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\@ACM@badge@width +\setlength\@ACM@badge@width{3pc} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@title@width} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% The width of the title +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\@ACM@title@width +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@badge@skip} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Redefined macro} +% The spacing between badges +% \begin{macrocode} +\newlength\@ACM@badge@skip +\setlength\@ACM@badge@skip{1pt} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmBadgeR} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Introduced macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmBadgeR{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmBadgeL} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Introduced macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmBadgeL{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmBadgeR} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Redefined macro} +% Setting the right badge +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\acmBadgeR[2][]{% + \ifx\@acmBadgeR\@empty + \gdef\@acmBadgeR{% + \smash{% + \raisebox{0.5\height}{% + \href{#1}{\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{#2}}}}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro{\@acmBadgeR}{% + \hspace{\@ACM@badge@skip}% + \smash{% + \raisebox{0.5\height}{% + \href{#1}{\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{#2}}}}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmBadgeL} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Redefined macro} +% Setting the left badge +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\acmBadgeL[2][]{% + \ifx\@acmBadgeL\@empty + \gdef\@acmBadgeL{% + \smash{% + \raisebox{0.5\height}{% + \href{#1}{\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{#2}}}}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro{\@acmBadgeL}{% + \hspace{\@ACM@badge@skip}% + \smash{% + \raisebox{0.5\height}{% + \href{#1}{\includegraphics[width=\@ACM@badge@width]{#2}}}}}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmBadge} +% \changes{v1.89}{2023/01/07}{Added macro} +% Just a syntax sugar for \cs{acmBadgeR} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\acmBadge=\acmBadgeR +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\startPage} +% The start page of the paper +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\startPage#1{\def\@startPage{#1}} +\startPage{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\terms} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{The \cs{terms} command now just produces +% a warning} +% Terms are obsolete. We use CCS now. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\terms#1{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{The command \string\terms{} is + obsolete. I am going to ignore it}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\keywords} +% Keywords are mostly obsolete. We use CCS now. Still it makes +% sense to keep them for compatibility. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\keywords#1{\def\@keywords{#1}} +\let\@keywords\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{1.66}{2019/12/18}{Added warning for missing keywords} +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{\if@ACM@nonacm\else\ifx\@keywords\@empty + \ifnum\getrefnumber{TotPages}>2\relax + \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{ACM keywords are mandatory + for papers over two pages}% + \fi\fi\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{abstract} +% The |amsart| package puts |abstract| in a box. Since we do not +% know whether we will use two-column mode, we prefer to save the text +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewenvironment{abstract}{\Collect@Body\@saveabstract}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@saveabstract} +% And saving the abstract +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@saveabstract#1{\if@ACM@maketitle@typeset + \ClassError{\@classname}{Abstract must be defined before maketitle + command. Please move it!}\fi + \long\gdef\@abstract{#1}} +\@saveabstract{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@lempty} +% The long version of \cs{@empty} (to compare with \cs{@abstract}) +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@lempty{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@printccs} +% \changes{v1.27}{2016/12/29}{Typo corrected} +% Whether to print CCS +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{printccs}[true]{% + \if@ACM@printccs + \ClassInfo{\@classname}{Printing CCS}% + \else + \ClassInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing CCS}% + \fi}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option printccs can be either true or false}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@printacmref} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Renamed from \cs{if@ACM@printbib}} +% Whether to print the ACM bibstrip +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{printacmref}[true]{% + \if@ACM@printacmref + \ClassInfo{\@classname}{Printing bibformat}% + \else + \ClassInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing bibformat}% + \fi}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option printacmref can be either true or false}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{1.66}{2019/12/18}{Added warning for longer papers} +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{\if@ACM@nonacm\else\if@ACM@printacmref\else + \ifnum\getrefnumber{TotPages}>1\relax + \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{% + ACM reference format is mandatory \MessageBreak + for papers over one page. \MessageBreak + Please add printacmref=true to the \MessageBreak + \string\settopmatter\space command.}% + \fi\fi\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@printfolios} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added macro} +% Whether to print folios +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@boolkey+{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{printfolios}[true]{% + \if@ACM@printfolios + \ClassInfo{\@classname}{Printing folios}% + \else + \ClassInfo{\@classname}{Suppressing folios}% + \fi}{\ClassError{\@classname}{The option printfolios can be either true or false}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@authorsperrow} +% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/13}{Added macro} +% The number of authors per row. 0 means use the default algorithm. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@cmdkey{@ACM@topmatter@}[@ACM@]{authorsperrow}[0]{% + \IfInteger{#1}{\ClassInfo{\@classname}{Setting authorsperrow to + #1}}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{The parameter authorsperrow must be + numerical. Ignoring the input #1}\gdef\@ACM@authorsperrow{0}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\settopmatter} +% The usual syntactic sugar +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\settopmatter#1{\setkeys{@ACM@topmatter@}{#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Print bibliographic information by +% default for the proceedings} +% Now the settings +% \begin{macrocode} +\settopmatter{printccs=true, printacmref=true} +\if@ACM@manuscript + \settopmatter{printfolios=true} +\else + \if@ACM@journal + \settopmatter{printfolios=true} + \else + \settopmatter{printfolios=false} + \fi +\fi +\settopmatter{authorsperrow=0} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@received} +% The container for the paper history +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@received{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\received} +% The \cs{received} command +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\received[2][]{\def\@tempa{#1}% + \ifx\@tempa\@empty + \ifx\@received\@empty + \gdef\@received{Received #2}% + \else + \g@addto@macro{\@received}{; revised #2}% + \fi + \else + \ifx\@received\@empty + \gdef\@received{#1 #2}% + \else + \g@addto@macro{\@received}{; #1 #2}% + \fi + \fi} +\AtEndDocument{% + \ifx\@received\@empty\else + \par\bigskip\noindent{\small\normalfont\@received\par}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmArticleType} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/13}{Introduced macro} +% Article type. We set up the color. +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@choicekey+{ACM}{articletype}[\ACM@ArticleType\ACM@ArticleType@nr]{% + Research,Review,Discussion,Invited,Position}[Review]{% + \ifcase\ACM@ArticleType@nr + \relax % Research + \colorlet{@ACM@Article@color}{ACMBlue}% + \or % Review + \colorlet{@ACM@Article@color}{ACMOrange}% + \or % Discussion + \colorlet{@ACM@Article@color}{ACMGreen}% + \or % Invited + \colorlet{@ACM@Article@color}{ACMPurple}% + \or % Position + \colorlet{@ACM@Article@color}{ACMRed}% + \fi +}{% + \ClassError{\@classname}{Article Type must be Research, Review,\MessageBreak + Discussion, Invited, or Position}} +\def\acmArticleType#1{\setkeys{ACM}{articletype=#1}} +\if@ACM@acmcp +\acmArticleType{Research}% +\fi + % \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@color@frame} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/13}{Introduced macro} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/25}{Added saving the position of the bottom} +% The colored frame for the acmcp +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{@ACM@color@frame}{% + \def\FrameCommand{\hspace*{-6.5pc}% + \colorbox{@ACM@Article@color!10!white}}% + \MakeFramed {\advance\hsize + -6.5pc\relax\FrameRestore}}{\zsaveposy{@ACM@acmcpframe@y}% + \endMakeFramed} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmCodeDataLink} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/13}{Introduced macro} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/28}{Added possibility to have several links} +% The code link +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmCodeLink#1{% + \ifx\@acmCodeDataLink\@empty + \gdef\@acmCodeDataLink{\url{#1}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro{\@acmCodeDataLink}{\\ \url{#1}}% + \fi} +\def\@acmCodeDataLink{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmContributions} +% \changes{v1.91}{2023/06/22}{Restored the macro} +% The authors' contrubution statement +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\acmContributions#1{\gdef\@acmContributions{#1}} +\acmContributions{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acmDataLink} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/13}{Introduced macro} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/28}{Now this is the same as the code link} +% The code link +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\acmDataLink\acmCodeLink +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +%\subsection{Concepts system} +%\label{sec:concepts} +% +% We exclude |CCSXML| stuff generated by the ACM system: +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{comment} +\excludecomment{CCSXML} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@concepts} +% This is the storage macro and counter for concepts +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@concepts\@empty +\newcounter{@concepts} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ccsdesc} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Now we can parse |Significance~General| nodes} +% The first argument is the significance, the second is the +% concept(s) +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\ccsdesc[2][100]{% + \ccsdesc@parse#1~#2~~\ccsdesc@parse@end} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ccsdesc@parse} +% \changes{v1.28}{2017/01/04}{Change from \cs{to} to +% \cs{textrightarrow} (Matteo Riondato)} +% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Add spacing after bullet and around +% rightarrow; semicolon separators no longer in bold/italic (John Wickerson)} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Now we can parse |Significance~General| nodes} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/10/23}{End the concepts list with a period +% (Philip Quinn)} +% \changes{v1.69}{2019/02/06}{Use math right arrow in text} +% The parser of the expression |Significance~General~Specific| (we need +% |textcomp| for |\textrightarrow|). Note that |Specific| can be empty! +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\textrightarrow{$\rightarrow$} +\def\ccsdesc@parse#1~#2~#3~{% + \stepcounter{@concepts}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname CCS@General@#2\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@General@#2\endcsname{\textbullet\ + \textbf{#2}}% + \expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@Punctuation@#2\endcsname{; }% + \expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@Specific@#2\endcsname{}% + \g@addto@macro{\@concepts}{\csname CCS@General@#2\endcsname + \csname CCS@Punctuation@#2\endcsname + \csname CCS@Specific@#2\endcsname}% + \fi + \ifx#3\relax\relax\else + \expandafter\gdef\csname CCS@Punctuation@#2\endcsname{ + \textrightarrow\ }% + \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter{\csname CCS@Specific@#2\endcsname}{% + \addtocounter{@concepts}{-1}% + \ifnum#1>499\textbf{#3}\else + \ifnum#1>299\textit{#3}\else + #3\fi\fi\ifnum\value{@concepts}=0.\else; \fi}% + \fi +\ccsdesc@parse@finish} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{1.66}{2019/12/18}{Added warning for missing concepts} +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{\if@ACM@nonacm\else\ifx\@concepts\@empty\relax + \ifnum\getrefnumber{TotPages}>2\relax + \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{CCS concepts are mandatory + for papers over two pages}% + \fi\fi\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ccdesc@parse@finish} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Added macro} +% Gobble everything to |\ccsdesc@parse@end| +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ccsdesc@parse@finish#1\ccsdesc@parse@end{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +%\subsection{Copyright system} +%\label{sec:copyright} +% +% This is from |acmcopyright.sty| +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@printcopyright} +% Whether to print a copyright symbol +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@printcopyright +\@printcopyrighttrue +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@printpermission} +% Whether to print the permission block +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@printpermission +\@printpermissiontrue +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@acmowned} +% Whether the ACM owns the rights to the paper +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@acmowned +\@acmownedtrue +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.10}{2016/05/22}{Changes of `licensedothergov' wording} +% \changes{v1.35}{2017/04/22}{If the copyright is set to usgov or +% rigtsretained, the price is suppressed} +% \changes{v1.51}{2018/04/05}{Suppress price if the copyright is set +% to iw3c2w3 or iw3c2w3g} +% \changes{v1.51}{2018/04/05}{Corrected the bug with price suppression} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added CC licenses} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Deleted acmPrice} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Deleted acmPrice} +% Keys: +% \begin{macrocode} +\define@choicekey*{ACM@}{acmcopyrightmode}[% + \acm@copyrightinput\acm@copyrightmode]{none,% + acmcopyright,acmlicensed,rightsretained,% + usgov,usgovmixed,cagov,cagovmixed,licensedusgovmixed,% + licensedcagov,licensedcagovmixed,othergov,licensedothergov,% + iw3c2w3,iw3c2w3g,cc}{% + \@printpermissiontrue + \@printcopyrighttrue + \@acmownedtrue + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=0\relax % none + \@printpermissionfalse + \@printcopyrightfalse + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=2\relax % acmlicensed + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=3\relax % rightsretained + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=4\relax % usgov + \@printpermissiontrue + \@printcopyrightfalse + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=6\relax % cagov + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=8\relax % licensedusgovmixed + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=9\relax % licensedcagov + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=10\relax % licensedcagovmixed + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=11\relax % othergov + \@acmownedtrue + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=12\relax % licensedothergov + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=13\relax % iw3c2w3 + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=14\relax % iw3c2w3g + \@acmownedfalse + \fi + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=15\relax % cc + \@acmownedfalse + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\setcopyright} +% This is the syntactic sugar around setting keys. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\setcopyright#1{\setkeys{ACM@}{acmcopyrightmode=#1}} +\setcopyright{acmlicensed} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\setcctype} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added macro} +% The type of Creative Commons license used +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\setcctype[2][4.0]{% + \def\ACM@cc@version{#1}% + \def\ACM@cc@type{#2}} +\setcctype{by} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@copyrightowner} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/16}{Added new copyright version: +% licensedcagov} +% \changes{v1.52}{2018/04/09}{Rewording of licenses} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added CC licenses} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Changed wording} +% \changes{v2.04}{2024/03/28}{Changed wording} +% Here is the owner of the copyright +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@copyrightowner{% + \ifcase\acm@copyrightmode\relax % none + \or % acmcopyright + ACM\@. + \or % acmlicensed + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to + ACM\@. + \or % rightsretained + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). + \or % usgov + \or % usgovmixed + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). + \or % cagov + Copyright Crown in Right of Canada. + \or %cagovmixed + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). + \or %licensedusgovmixed + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to + ACM\@. + \or % licensedcagov + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). + \or %licensedcagovmixed + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to + ACM\@. + \or % othergov + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). + \or % licensedothergov + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). Publication rights licensed to + ACM\@. + \or % ic2w3www + IW3C2 (International World Wide Web Conference Committee), published + under Creative Commons CC-BY~4.0 License. + \or % ic2w3wwwgoogle + IW3C2 (International World Wide Web Conference Committee), published + under Creative Commons CC-BY-NC-ND~4.0 License. + \or % cc + Copyright held by the owner/author(s). + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@formatdoi} +% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.32}{2017/04/07}{New doi format} +% Print a clickable DOI +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@formatdoi#1{\url{https://doi.org/#1}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@copyright@check@cc} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/07/30}{Added macro} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Moved to warning} +% \changes{v2.09}{2024/08/25}{Deleted macro} +% This macro is no longer needed due to the change in ACM policy. +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@copyrightpermission} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/16}{Added new copyright version: licensedcagov} +% \changes{v1.50}{2018/02/07}{New copyright statements for iw3c2w3[g]} +% \changes{v1.52}{2018/04/09}{Another rewording of copyright +% statements for iw3c2w3[g]} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added CC licenses} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/07/30}{CC licenses now are allowed only for +% non-acm or ACM engage publications} +% \changes{v2.09}{2024/08/25}{Deleted checking whether CC licenses are +% allowed} +% \changes{v2.11}{2024/12/21}{Changed URL for CC licenses} +% The canned permission block. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@copyrightpermission{% + \ifcase\acm@copyrightmode\relax % none + \or % acmcopyright + Permission to make digital or hard copies of all or part of this + work for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided + that copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial + advantage and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on + the first page. Copyrights for components of this work owned by + others than ACM must be honored. Abstracting with credit is + permitted. To copy otherwise, or republish, to post on servers or + to redistribute to lists, requires prior specific permission + and\hspace*{.5pt}/or + a fee. Request permissions from permissions@acm.org. + \or % acmlicensed + Permission to make digital or hard copies of all or part of this + work for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided + that copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial + advantage and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on + the first page. Copyrights for components of this work owned by + others than the author(s) must be honored. Abstracting with credit + is permitted. To copy otherwise, or republish, to post on servers + or to redistribute to lists, requires prior specific permission + and\hspace*{.5pt}/or a fee. Request permissions from + permissions@acm.org. + \or % rightsretained + Permission to make digital or hard copies of all or part of this + work for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided + that copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial + advantage and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on + the first page. Copyrights for third-party components of this work + must be honored. For all other uses, contact the + owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % usgov + This paper is authored by an employee(s) of the United States + Government and is in the public domain. Non-exclusive copying or + redistribution is allowed, provided that the article citation is + given and the authors and agency are clearly identified as its + source. Request permissions from + owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % usgovmixed + ACM acknowledges that this contribution was authored or co-authored + by an employee, contractor, or affiliate of the United States + government. As such, the United States government retains a + nonexclusive, royalty-free right to publish or reproduce this + article, or to allow others to do so, for government purposes + only. Request permissions from owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % cagov + This article was authored by employees of the Government of + Canada. As such, the Canadian government retains all interest in + the copyright to this work and grants to ACM a nonexclusive, + royalty-free right to publish or reproduce this article, or to + allow others to do so, provided that clear attribution is given + both to the authors and the Canadian government agency employing + them. Permission to make digital or hard copies for personal or + classroom use is granted. Copies must bear this notice and the full + citation on the first page. Copyrights for components of this work + owned by others than the Canadian Government must be honored. To + copy otherwise, distribute, republish, or post, requires prior + specific permission and/or a fee. Request permissions from + owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % cagovmixed + ACM acknowledges that this contribution was co-authored by an + affiliate of the national government of Canada. As such, the Crown + in Right of Canada retains an equal interest in the + copyright. Reprints must include clear attribution to ACM and the + author’s government agency affiliation. Permission to make digital + or hard copies for personal or classroom use is granted. Copies + must bear this notice and the full citation on the first + page. Copyrights for components of this work owned by others than + ACM must be honored. To copy otherwise, distribute, republish, or + post, requires prior specific permission and/or a fee. Request + permissions from owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % licensedusgovmixed + Publication rights licensed to ACM\@. ACM acknowledges that this + contribution was authored or co-authored by an employee, contractor + or affiliate of the United States government. As such, the + Government retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to publish or + reproduce this article, or to allow others to do so, for Government + purposes only. Request permissions from + owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % licensedcagov + This article was authored by employees of the Government of + Canada. As such, the Canadian government retains all interest in + the copyright to this work and grants to ACM a nonexclusive, + royalty-free right to publish or reproduce this article, or to + allow others to do so, provided that clear attribution is given + both to the authors and the Canadian government agency employing + them. Permission to make digital or hard copies for personal or + classroom use is granted. Copies must bear this notice and the full + citation on the first page. Copyrights for components of this work + owned by others than the Canadian Government must be honored. To + copy otherwise, distribute, republish, or post, requires prior + specific permission and/or a fee. Request permissions from + owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % licensedcagovmixed + Publication rights licensed to ACM. ACM acknowledges that this + contribution was authored or co-authored by an employee, contractor + or affiliate of the national government of Canada. As such, the + Government retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to publish or + reproduce this article, or to allow others to do so, for Government + purposes only. Request permissions from + owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % othergov + ACM acknowledges that this contribution was authored or co-authored + by an employee, contractor or affiliate of a national + government. As such, the Government retains a nonexclusive, + royalty-free right to publish or reproduce this article, or to + allow others to do so, for Government purposes only. Request + permissions from owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % licensedothergov + Publication rights licensed to ACM\@. ACM acknowledges that this + contribution was authored or co-authored by an employee, contractor + or affiliate of a national government. As such, the Government + retains a nonexclusive, royalty-free right to publish or reproduce + this article, or to allow others to do so, for Government purposes + only. Request permissions from owner\hspace*{.5pt}/author(s). + \or % iw3c2w3 + This paper is published under the Creative Commons Attribution~4.0 + International (CC-BY~4.0) license. Authors reserve their rights to + disseminate the work on their personal and corporate Web sites with + the appropriate attribution. + \or % iw3c2w3g + This paper is published under the Creative Commons + Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs~4.0 International + (CC-BY-NC-ND~4.0) license. Authors reserve their rights to + disseminate the work on their personal and corporate Web sites with + the appropriate attribution. + \or % CC + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{zero}{% + \def\ACM@CC@Url{https://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0}}{% + \edef\ACM@CC@Url{https://creativecommons.org/licenses/\ACM@cc@type/\ACM@cc@version}}% + \href{\ACM@CC@Url}{\includegraphics[height=5ex]{doclicense-CC-\ACM@cc@type-88x31}}\\ + \href{\ACM@CC@Url}{% + This work is licensed under a Creative Commons + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{zero}{CC0 1.0 Universal}{% + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{by}{Attribution}{}% + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{by-sa}{Attribution-ShareAlike}{}% + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{by-nd}{Attribution-NoDerivatives}{}% + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{by-nc}{Attribution-NonCommercial}{}% + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{by-nc-sa}{Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike}{}% + \IfEq{\ACM@cc@type}{by-nc-nd}{Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives}{}% + ~\IfEq{\ACM@cc@version}{4.0}{4.0 International}{3.0 Unported}% + } + License.}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +%% +% +% \begin{macro}{\copyrightyear} +% By default, the copyright year is the same as \cs{acmYear}, but +% one can override this: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\copyrightyear#1{\def\@copyrightyear{#1}} +\copyrightyear{\@acmYear} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@teaserfigures} +% The teaser figures container +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@teaserfigures{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{teaserfigure} +% The teaser figure +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{teaserfigure}{\Collect@Body\@saveteaser}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@saveteaser} +% Saving the teaser +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@saveteaser#1{\g@addto@macro\@teaserfigures{\@teaser{#1}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\thanks} +% We redefine |amsart| \cs{thanks} so the |anonymous| key works +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{% + \@ifnotempty{#1}{% + \if@ACM@anonymous + \g@addto@macro\thankses{\thanks{A note}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\thankses{\thanks{#1}}% + \fi}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\anon} +% \changes{v1.82}{2022/01/11}{Introduced macro}% +% We provide \cs{anon} command, which obscures parts of the text +% if the package option |anonymous| is set +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\anon}[2][ANONYMIZED]{% + \if@ACM@anonymous% + {\color{ACMOrange}#1}% + \else% + #2% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Maketitle hook} +%\label{sec:hook} +% +% The current \LaTeX\ provides a nice |lthooks| mechanism. However, +% since it is relatively new, we will use oldfashioned approach---at +% least for now. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@beginmaketitlehook} +% \changes{v1.75}{2020/11/15}{Introduced macro} +% The hook +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifx\@beginmaketitlehook\@undefined + \let\@beginmaketitlehook\@empty +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginMaketitle} +% \changes{v1.75}{2020/11/15}{Introduced macro} +% Adding to the hook +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\AtBeginMaketitle{\g@addto@macro\@beginmaketitlehook} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{ACM Engage top matter} +%\label{sec:acmengagetop} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmengagemetadata} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Introduced macro} +% The special metadata for ACM engage course materials +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmengagemetadata{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\setengagemetadata} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Introduced macro} +% Adding topic to engage metadata +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\setengagemetadata#1#2{% + \g@addto@macro{\@acmengagemetadata}{% + \@setengagemetadata{#1}{#2}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Typesetting top matter} +% \label{sec:maketitle} +% +% \begin{macro}{\mktitle@bx} +% Some of our formats use a two-column design. Some use a one-column +% design. In all cases we use a wide title. Thus we typeset the top +% matter in a special box to be used in the construction +% \cs{@twocolumn}\oarg{box}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newbox\mktitle@bx +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\maketitle} +% \changes{v1.03}{2016/04/22}{Added special case of authorversion} +% \changes{v1.07}{2016/05/03}{Corrected a bug with abstract footnotes} +% \changes{v1.07}{2016/05/03}{Corrected a bug with permssion and +% footnotes order} +% \changes{v1.10}{2016/05/23}{Corrected a bug with doi in manuscript +% and author vertsion, +% \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/36}} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Moved thankses to copyrightpermission box} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/27}{Fixed the bug with figures on top and +% bottom of the title page, thanks to David Epstein} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{Deleted `DOI' from doi numbers} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{Added date to the bibstrip in conf proceedings} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{The \cs{terms} command is now obsolete} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/11}{Rearranged bibstrip} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Empty DOI or ISBN are not printed (by +% Michael Ekstrand)} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Added authors' addresses} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Thankses go before authors' addresses} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/23}{Added acmart and version info to +% pdfcreator tag} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/10/14}{Suppressed empty DOI (Serguei Mokhov)} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/11/18}{Added language and doctitle attributes +% to PDF (Andreas Reichinger)} +% \changes{v1.55}{2018/10/14}{Fixes topnum} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Original \cs{vspace} inside +% \cs{maketitle}} +% \changes{v1.64}{2019/08/17}{Added a switch setting to show that +% \cs{maketitle} is typeset} +% \changes{v1.72}{2020/06/14}{Do not andify authors for pdf metadata +% (Scott Pakin)} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Do not check again the presense of +% address fields} +% \changes{v1.75}{2020/11/15}{Added \cs{@beginmaketitlehook}} +% \changes{v1.76}{2021/04/05}{Put \cs{par} inside group for keywords} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{I13n} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{acmengage} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/07/30}{CC license are allowed for non-acm +% publications} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/24}{Deleted acmPrice} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/11/05}{Added ``ACM'' for papers} +% \changes{v2.03}{2023/12/04}{Special processing for conferences in +% TOG} +% \changes{v2.11}{2024/12/07}{Deleted conference date from bibstrip} +% The (in)famous \cs{maketitle}. Note that in |sigchi-a| mode, authors +% are \emph{not} in the title box. +% +% Another note: there is a subtle difference between author notes, +% title notes and thanks. The latter two refer to the paper itself +% and therefore belong to the copyright/permission block. By the +% way, this was the default behavior of the old ACM classes. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\maketitle{\@beginmaketitlehook + \@ACM@maketitle@typesettrue + \if@ACM@anonymous + % Anonymize omission of \author-s + \ifnum\num@authorgroups=0\author{}\fi + \fi + \begingroup + \let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig + \let\@footnotemark\@footnotemark@nolink + \let\@footnotetext\@footnotetext@nolink + \renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}% + \hsize=\textwidth + \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\@thefnmark}}}% + \@mktitle\if@ACM@sigchiamode\else\@mkauthors\fi\@mkteasers + \@printtopmatter + \if@ACM@sigchiamode\@mkauthors\fi + \setcounter{footnote}{0}% + \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}% + \@titlenotes + \@subtitlenotes + \@authornotes + \let\@makefnmark\relax + \let\@thefnmark\relax + \let\@makefntext\noindent + \ifx\@empty\thankses\else + \footnotetextauthorsaddresses{% + \def\par{\let\par\@par}\parindent\z@\@setthanks}% + \fi + \if@ACM@acmcp\else + \ifx\@empty\@authorsaddresses\else + \if@ACM@anonymous\else + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@tog + \footnotetextauthorsaddresses{% + \def\par{\let\par\@par}\parindent\z@\@setauthorsaddresses}% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi + \if@ACM@nonacm + \ifnum\acm@copyrightmode=15\relax % cc + \footnotetextcopyrightpermission{\@copyrightpermission}% + \fi + \else + \if@ACM@acmcp\else + \footnotetextcopyrightpermission{% + \if@ACM@authordraft + \raisebox{-2ex}[\z@][\z@]{\makebox[0pt][l]{\large\bfseries + Unpublished working draft. Not for distribution.}}% + \color[gray]{0.9}% + \fi + \parindent\z@\parskip0.1\baselineskip + \if@ACM@authorversion\else + \if@printpermission\@copyrightpermission\par\fi + \fi + \if@ACM@manuscript\else + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip\else % Print the conference information + \if@ACM@engage + {\itshape \@acmBooktitle, \@acmYear.}\par + \else + {\itshape \acmConference@shortname, \acmConference@venue}\par + \fi + \fi + \fi + \if@printcopyright + \copyright\ \@copyrightyear\ \@copyrightowner\\ + \else + \ifx\@copyrightyear\@empty\else + \@copyrightyear.\ + \fi + \fi + \if@ACM@manuscript + Manuscript submitted to ACM\\ + \else + \if@ACM@authorversion + This is the author's version of the work. It is posted here for + your personal use. Not for redistribution. The definitive Version + of Record was published in + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip + \emph{\@journalName}% + \else + \emph{\@acmBooktitle}% + \fi + \ifx\@acmDOI\@empty + . + \else + , \@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}. + \fi\\ + \else + \if@ACM@nonacm\else + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip + ACM~\@permissionCodeTwo/\@acmYear/\@acmMonth-ART\@acmArticle\\ + \@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}% + \else % Conference + \ifx\@acmISBN\@empty\else ACM~ISBN~\@acmISBN\\\fi + \ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi}% + \fi + \fi + \endgroup + \if@ACM@engage\@typesetengagemetadata\fi + \setcounter{footnote}{0}% + \@mkabstract + \ifx\@translatedabstracts\@empty\else + \@translatedabstracts\fi + \if@ACM@printccs + \ifx\@concepts\@empty\else\bgroup + {\@specialsection{CCS Concepts}% + \noindent\@concepts\par}\egroup + \fi + \fi + \if@ACM@acmcp\else + \ifx\@keywords\@empty\else\bgroup + {\@specialsection{\keywordsname}% + \noindent\@keywords\par}\egroup + \fi + \ifx\@translatedkeywords\@empty\else + \@translatedkeywords + \fi + \fi + \let\metadata@authors=\authors + \nxandlist{, }{, }{, }\metadata@authors + \def\@ACM@checkaffil{}% + \hypersetup{% + pdfauthor={\metadata@authors}, + pdftitle={\@title}, + pdfsubject={\@concepts}, + pdfkeywords={\@keywords}, + pdfcreator={LaTeX with acmart + \csname ver@\@classname.cls\endcsname\space + and hyperref + \csname ver@hyperref.sty\endcsname}}% + \andify\authors + \andify\shortauthors + \global\let\authors=\authors + \global\let\shortauthors=\shortauthors + \if@ACM@printacmref + \@mkbibcitation + \fi + \global\@topnum\z@ % this prevents floats from falling + % at the top of page 1 + \global\@botnum\z@ % we do not want them to be on the bottom either + \@printendtopmatter + \@afterindentfalse + \@afterheading + \if@ACM@acmcp + \set@ACM@acmcpbox + \AtEndDocument{\end@ACM@color@frame}% + \@ACM@color@frame + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\set@ACM@acmcpbox} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/14}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/25}{Added logo} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/25}{Added zref position of the bottom} +% Setting infobox for acmcp +% \begin{macrocode} +\newbox\@ACM@acmcpbox +\def\set@ACM@acmcpbox{% + \bgroup + \hsize=5pc + \global\setbox\@ACM@acmcpbox=\vbox{% + \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}% + {\includegraphics[width=\hsize]{acm-jdslogo}\par}% + \scriptsize + \ifnum\getrefnumber{TotPages}>1\else + \zrefused{@ACM@acmcpbox@y}% + \zrefused{@ACM@acmcpframe@y}% + \@tempdima=\dimexpr\zposy{@ACM@acmcpbox@y}sp - + \zposy{@ACM@acmcpframe@y}sp+0.3\FrameSep+ + \@ACM@acmcp@delta\relax + \ifdim\@tempdima>0pt\relax + \vspace*{\@tempdima}% + \protected@write\@auxout{}% + {\string\global\@ACM@acmcp@delta=\the\@tempdima\relax}% + \fi + \fi + \ifx\@acmCodeDataLink\@empty\else\bigskip + Code and data links:\\ \@acmCodeDataLink\par\bigskip + \fi + \ifx\@keywords\@empty\else\bigskip + Keywords: \@keywords\par + \fi + \ifx\@acmContributions\@empty\else\bigskip + \@acmContributions\par + \fi + \ifx\@empty\@authorsaddresses\else\bigskip\@setauthorsaddresses\fi + \zsaveposy{@ACM@acmcpbox@y}% + \par + } +\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@specialsection} +% \changes{v1.66}{2019/11/23}{Suppress warnings about \cs{vspace}} +% \changes{v1.67}{2020/01/11}{Paragraph inside group does not print +% its argument. Added a bugfix} +% \changes{v1.68}{2020/01/19}{Deleted grouping altogether} +% \changes{v1.69}{2020/02/02}{Changed dot to colon for sigplan} +% \changes{v1.78}{2021/05/02}{Again suppressed \cs{vspace} warning} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% This macro starts sections for proceedings and uses \cs{small} for journals +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@specialsection#1{% + \let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \par\medskip\small\noindent#1: % + \or % acmsmall + \par\medskip\small\noindent#1: % + \or % acmlarge + \par\medskip\small\noindent#1: % + \or % acmtog + \par\medskip\small\noindent#1: % + \or % sigconf + \section*{#1}% + \or % siggraph + \section*{#1}% + \or % sigplan + \noindentparagraph*{#1:~}% + \or % sigchi + \section*{#1}% + \or % sigchi-a + \section*{#1}% + \or % acmengage + \section*{#1}% + \or % acmcp + \section*{#1}% + \fi + \let\@vspace\@vspace@acm + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@acm +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@printtopmatter} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added processing badges} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/29}{Deleted rule} +% \changes{v1.78}{2021/05/16}{Added processing the overflowing title box} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% \changes{1.89}{2022/12/27}{Moved badges to top header} +% The printing of top matter starts a new page and uses the given +% title box. +% +% Note that if there are too many authors, |\mktitle@bx| might +% overflow the page. Therefore we start with checking this and if +% this happens, we split the box and print it page by page. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@printtopmatter{% + \ifx\@startPage\@empty + \gdef\@startPage{1}% + \else + \setcounter{page}{\@startPage}% + \fi + \@tempdima=\ht\mktitle@bx + \advance\@tempdima by \dp\mktitle@bx + \ifdim\@tempdima>0.9\textheight + \loop + \setbox\@tempboxa=\vsplit \mktitle@bx to 0.9\textheight + \thispagestyle{firstpagestyle}% + \noindent\unvbox\@tempboxa + \clearpage + \@tempdima=\ht\mktitle@bx + \advance\@tempdima by \dp\mktitle@bx + \ifdim\@tempdima>0.9\textheight\repeat + \fi + \thispagestyle{firstpagestyle}% + \noindent + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \box\mktitle@bx\par + \or % acmsmall + \box\mktitle@bx\par + \or % acmlarge + \box\mktitle@bx\par + \or % acmtog + \twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]% + \or % sigconf + \twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]% + \or % siggraph + \twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]% + \or % sigplan + \twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]% + \or % sigchi + \twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]% + \or % sigchi-a + \par\box\mktitle@bx\par\bigskip + \or % acmengage + \twocolumn[\box\mktitle@bx]% + \or % acmcp + \box\mktitle@bx\par + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% The title of the article +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mktitle{% + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \@mktitle@i + \or % acmsmall + \@mktitle@i + \or % acmlarge + \@mktitle@i + \or % acmtog + \@mktitle@i + \or % sigconf + \@mktitle@iii + \or % siggraph + \@mktitle@iii + \or % sigplan + \@mktitle@iii + \or % sigchi + \@mktitle@iii + \or % sigchi-a + \@mktitle@iv + \or % acmengage + \@mktitle@iii + \or % acmcp + \@mktitle@i + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@titlefont} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.45}{2017/08/15}{Switched \cs{bfeseries}\cs{sffamily} to +% \cs{sffamily}\cs{bfseries}} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% The font to typeset the title +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@titlefont{% + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \LARGE\sffamily\bfseries + \or % acmsmall + \LARGE\sffamily\bfseries + \or % acmlarge + \LARGE\sffamily\bfseries + \or % acmtog + \Huge\sffamily + \or % sigconf + \Huge\sffamily\bfseries + \or % siggraph + \Huge\sffamily\bfseries + \or % sigplan + \Huge\bfseries + \or % sigchi + \Huge\sffamily\bfseries + \or % sigchi-a + \Huge\bfseries + \or % acmengage + \Huge\sffamily\bfseries + \or % acmcp + \LARGE\sffamily\bfseries + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@subtitlefont} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/12}{Added \cs{normalsize}} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% The font to typeset the subtitle +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@subtitlefont{\normalsize + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \mdseries + \or % acmsmall + \mdseries + \or % acmlarge + \mdseries + \or % acmtog + \LARGE + \or % sigconf + \LARGE\mdseries + \or % siggraph + \LARGE\mdseries + \or % sigplan + \LARGE\mdseries + \or % sigchi + \LARGE\mdseries + \or % sigchi-a + \mdseries + \or % acmengage + \LARGE\mdseries + \or % acmcp + \mdseries + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@i} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Made generic} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added processing badges} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added \cs{translatedtitle} and +% \cs{translatedsubtitle}} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/14}{Special treatment for acmcp} +% \changes{v1.88}{2022/10/24}{Moved down title for acmcp} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Moved badges to top header} +% \changes{v1.89}{2023/01/07}{Moved up acmcp title} +% The version of \cs{mktitle} for most journals +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mktitle@i{\hsize=\textwidth + \if@ACM@acmcp + \advance\hsize by -6pc% + \fi + \@ACM@title@width=\hsize + \setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent\@titlefont + \parbox[t]{\@ACM@title@width}{\raggedright + \@titlefont\noindent + \@title\@translatedtitle% + \ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else + \par\noindent{\@subtitlefont\@subtitle\@translatedsubtitle}% + \fi}% + \par\bigskip}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@ii} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Now this macro is obsolete} +% The version of \cs{mktitle} for TOG. Since v1.06, this is subsumed by +% the \cs{mktitle@i} macro +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@iii} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Made more generic} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Added processing badges} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added \cs{translatedtitle} and +% \cs{translatedsubtitle}} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Moved badges to top header} +% The version of \cs{@mktitle} for SIG proceedings. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mktitle@iii{\hsize=\textwidth + \setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\@titlefont\centering + \@ACM@title@width=\hsize + \parbox[t]{\@ACM@title@width}{\centering\@titlefont + \@title\@translatedtitle% + \ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else + \par\noindent{\@subtitlefont\@subtitle\@translatedsubtitle} + \fi + }% + \par\bigskip}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mktitle@iv} +% \changes{v1.06}{2016/05/01}{Made more generic} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added \cs{translatedtitle} and +% \cs{translatedsubtitle}} +% The version of \cs{@mktitle} for |sigchi-a| +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mktitle@iv{\hsize=\textwidth + \setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\raggedright\leftskip5pc\@titlefont + \noindent\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 2pt\hfill\kern0pt\par + \noindent\@title\@translatedtitle% + \ifx\@subtitle\@empty\else + \par\noindent\@subtitlefont\@subtitle\@translatedsubtitle% + \fi + \par\bigskip}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@addtoaddress} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/03/29}{Deleted the cleaders code} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newbox\@ACM@commabox +\def\@ACM@addtoaddress#1{% + \ifvmode\else + \if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation\else + \unskip,~% + \fi\fi + #1} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\institution} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Check the presence in affil} +% \begin{macro}{\position} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \begin{macro}{\department} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/10}{Added optional parameter} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \begin{macro}{\streetaddress} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG} +% \changes{v2.06}{2024/04/13}{We now do not collect postal information +% anymore} +% \begin{macro}{\city} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Check the presence in affil} +% \begin{macro}{\state} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG} +% \begin{macro}{\postcode} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/15}{We now do not print this even in SIG} +% \changes{v2.06}{2024/04/13}{We now do not collect postal information +% anymore} +% \begin{macro}{\country} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/03}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Fixed bugs with extra spaces} +% \changes{v1.43}{2017/07/11}{Added comma before country for journals} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/30}{Corrected spacing for institution} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Check the presence in affil} +% \changes{v1.86}{2022/06/26}{Error if country is empty} +% Theoretically we can define the macros for \cs{affiliation} inside +% the \cs{@mkauthors}-style commands. However, this would lead to a +% strange error if an author uses them outside \cs{affiliation}. Of +% course we can make them produce an error message, but\ldots +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\streetaddress#1{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{ACM no longer collects + authors' postal addresses. I am ignoring your street + address}\unskip\ignorespaces} +\def\postcode#1{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{ACM no longer collects + authors' postal addresses. I am ignoring your postal + code}\unskip\ignorespaces} +\if@ACM@journal + \def\position#1{\unskip\ignorespaces} + \def\institution#1{\global\@ACM@instpresenttrue + \unskip~#1\ignorespaces} + \def\city#1{\global\@ACM@citypresenttrue\unskip\ignorespaces} + \def\state#1{\unskip\ignorespaces} + \newcommand\department[2][0]{\unskip\ignorespaces} + \def\country#1{\StrDel{#1}{ }[\@tempa]% + \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else + \global\@ACM@countrypresenttrue\fi + \if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation\else, \fi#1\ignorespaces} +\else + \def\position#1{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation#1\else#1\par\fi}% + \def\institution#1{\global\@ACM@instpresenttrue + \if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation#1\else#1\par\fi}% + \newcommand\department[2][0]{\if@ACM@affiliation@obeypunctuation + #2\else#2\par\fi}% + \def\city#1{\global\@ACM@citypresenttrue\@ACM@addtoaddress{#1}}% + \let\state\@ACM@addtoaddress + \def\country#1{\global\@ACM@countrypresenttrue\@ACM@addtoaddress{#1}}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/09}{TOG now uses the same authors block as +% other journals} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% Typesetting the authors +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkauthors{\begingroup + \hsize=\textwidth + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \@mkauthors@i + \or % acmsmall + \@mkauthors@i + \or % acmlarge + \@mkauthors@i + \or % acmtog + \@mkauthors@i + \or % sigconf + \@mkauthors@iii + \or % siggraph + \@mkauthors@iii + \or % sigplan + \@mkauthors@iii + \or % sigchi + \@mkauthors@iii + \or % sigchi-a + \@mkauthors@iv + \or % acmengage + \@mkauthors@iii + \or % acmcp + \@mkauthors@i + \fi + \endgroup +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@authorfont} +% Somehow different conferences use different fonts for author +% names. Why? +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@authorfont{\Large\sffamily} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@affiliationfont} +% Font for affiliations +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@affiliationfont{\normalsize\normalfont} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Font adjustments for acmsmall} +% Adjusting fonts for different formats +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall + \def\@authorfont{\large\sffamily} + \def\@affiliationfont{\small\normalfont} +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog + \def\@authorfont{\LARGE\sffamily} + \def\@affiliationfont{\large} +\or % sigconf + \def\@authorfont{\LARGE} + \def\@affiliationfont{\large} +\or % siggraph + \def\@authorfont{\normalsize\normalfont} + \def\@affiliationfont{\normalsize\normalfont} +\or % sigplan + \def\@authorfont{\Large\normalfont} + \def\@affiliationfont{\normalsize\normalfont} +\or % sigchi + \def\@authorfont{\bfseries} + \def\@affiliationfont{\mdseries} +\or % sigchi-a + \def\@authorfont{\bfseries} + \def\@affiliationfont{\mdseries} +\or % acmengage + \def\@authorfont{\LARGE} + \def\@affiliationfont{\large} +\or % acmcp + \def\@authorfont{\large\sffamily} + \def\@affiliationfont{\small\normalfont} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@typeset@author@line} +% \changes{v1.18}{2016/07/12}{Added macro} +% At this point we have \cs{@currentauthors} and +% \cs{@currentaffiliations}. We typeset them in the journal style +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@typeset@author@line{% + \andify\@currentauthors\par\noindent + \@currentauthors\def\@currentauthors{}% + \ifx\@currentaffiliations\@empty\else + \andify\@currentaffiliations + \unskip, {\@currentaffiliations}\par + \fi + \def\@currentaffiliations{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@instpresent} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Added macro} +% Whether the given affiliation has institution +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@instpresent +\@ACM@instpresenttrue +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@citypresent} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Added macro} +% Whether the given affiliation has city +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@citypresent +\@ACM@citypresenttrue +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\if@ACM@countrypresent} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Added macro} +% Whether the given affiliation has country +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@ACM@countrypresent +\@ACM@countrypresenttrue +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@resetaffil} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Added macro} +% Reset affiliation flags +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@ACM@resetaffil{% + \global\@ACM@instpresentfalse + \global\@ACM@citypresentfalse + \global\@ACM@countrypresentfalse +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ACM@checkaffil} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.75}{2020/11/15}{Changed warning to error for country} +% Check affiliation flags +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@ACM@checkaffil{% + \if@ACM@instpresent\else + \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{No institution present for an affiliation}% + \fi + \if@ACM@citypresent\else + \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{No city present for an affiliation}% + \fi + \if@ACM@countrypresent\else + \ClassError{\@classname}{No country present for an affiliation}{ACM + requires each author to indicate their country using country macro.}% + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@i} +% \changes{v1.18}{2016/07/12}{Now we andify affiliations} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/04}{Switched to MakeTextUppercase} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Check the presence of required elements +% for affiliations} +% \changes{v1.78}{2021/05/16}{Unboxing \cs{mktitle@bx}} +% This version is used in most journal formats. Note that \cs{and} between +% authors with the same affiliation becomes \verb*| and |: +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/14}{Special treatment for acmcp} +% \changes{v1.12}{2024/12/28}{Removed MakeTextUppercase due to a bug +% with new kernel} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkauthors@i{% + \def\@currentauthors{}% + \def\@currentaffiliations{}% + \global\let\and\@typeset@author@line + \def\@author##1{% + \ifx\@currentauthors\@empty + \gdef\@currentauthors{\@authorfont\MakeUppercase{##1}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro{\@currentauthors}{\and\MakeUppercase{##1}}% + \fi + \gdef\and{}}% + \def\email##1##2{}% + \def\affiliation##1##2{% + \def\@tempa{##2}\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else + \ifx\@currentaffiliations\@empty + \gdef\@currentaffiliations{% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}% + \@ACM@resetaffil + \@affiliationfont##2\@ACM@checkaffil}% + \else + \g@addto@macro{\@currentaffiliations}{\and + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}\@ACM@resetaffil + ##2\@ACM@checkaffil}% + \fi + \fi + \global\let\and\@typeset@author@line}% + \if@ACM@acmcp + \advance\hsize by -6pc% + \fi + \global\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent\unvbox\mktitle@bx\par\medskip + \noindent\addresses\@typeset@author@line + \par\medskip}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@ii} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/09}{Deleted} +% The \cs{@mkauthors@ii} command was the version used in |acmtog|. +% It is no longer necessary. +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\author@bx} +% The box to put an individual author in +% \begin{macrocode} +\newbox\author@bx +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\author@bx@wd} +% The width of the author box +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\author@bx@wd +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\author@bx@sep} +% The separation between author boxes +% \begin{macrocode} +\newskip\author@bx@sep +\author@bx@sep=1pc\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@typeset@author@bx} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{Moved to separate macro} +% \changes{v1.61}{2019/05/26}{Added \cs{normalbaselines}} +% Typesetting the box with authors. Note that in |sigchi-a| the box +% is not centered. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@typeset@author@bx{\bgroup\hsize=\author@bx@wd + \def\and{\par}\normalbaselines + \global\setbox\author@bx=\vtop{\if@ACM@sigchiamode\else\centering\fi + \@authorfont\@currentauthors\par\@affiliationfont + \@currentaffiliation\par}\egroup + \box\author@bx\hspace{\author@bx@sep}% + \gdef\@currentauthors{}% + \gdef\@currentaffiliation{}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@iii} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{New authors system} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/12}{Added authorsperrow overrride} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Check the presence of required elements +% for affiliations} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/29}{Email is now clickable} +% \changes{v1.78}{2021/05/16}{Unboxing \cs{mktitle@bx}} +% The |sigconf| version. Here we use a centered design with each +% author in a separate box. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkauthors@iii{% +% \end{macrocode} +% First, we need to determine the design of the author strip. The +% boxes are separated by \cs{author@bx@sep} plus two +% \cs{author@bx@sep} margins. This means that each box must be of +% width $(\cs{textwidth}-\cs{author@bx@sep})/N-\cs{author@bx@sep}$, +% where $N$ is the number of boxes per row. +% \begin{macrocode} + \author@bx@wd=\textwidth\relax + \advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax + \ifnum\@ACM@authorsperrow>0\relax + \divide\author@bx@wd by \@ACM@authorsperrow\relax + \else + \ifcase\num@authorgroups + \relax % 0? + \or % 1=one author per row + \or % 2=two authors per row + \divide\author@bx@wd by \num@authorgroups\relax + \or % 3=three authors per row + \divide\author@bx@wd by \num@authorgroups\relax + \or % 4=two authors per row (!) + \divide\author@bx@wd by 2\relax + \else % three authors per row + \divide\author@bx@wd by 3\relax + \fi + \fi + \advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% Now, parsing of \cs{addresses}: +% \begin{macrocode} + \gdef\@currentauthors{}% + \gdef\@currentaffiliation{}% + \def\@author##1{\ifx\@currentauthors\@empty + \gdef\@currentauthors{\par##1}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{\par##1}% + \fi + \gdef\and{}}% + \def\email##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty + \gdef\@currentaffiliation{\bgroup + \mathchardef\UrlBreakPenalty=10000\href{mailto:##2}{##2}\egroup}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par\bgroup + \mathchardef\UrlBreakPenalty=10000\href{mailto:##2}{##2}\egroup}% + \fi}% + \def\affiliation##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty + \gdef\@currentaffiliation{% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}\@ACM@resetaffil + ##2\@ACM@checkaffil}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}\@ACM@resetaffil + ##2\@ACM@checkaffil}% + \fi + \global\let\and\@typeset@author@bx +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Actual typesetting is done by the \cs{and} macro: +% \begin{macrocode} + \hsize=\textwidth + \global\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent + \unvbox\mktitle@bx\par\medskip\leavevmode + \lineskip=1pc\relax\centering\hspace*{-1em}% + \addresses\let\and\@typeset@author@bx\and\par\bigskip}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthors@iv} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added obeypunctuation code} +% \changes{v1.36}{2017/05/12}{Added authorsperrow overrride} +% \changes{v1.73}{2020/09/07}{Check the presence of required elements +% for affiliations} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/29}{Email is now clickable} +% The |sigchi-a| version. We put authors in the main text with +% no more than 2 authors per line, unless overriden. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkauthors@iv{% +% \end{macrocode} +% First, we need to determine the design of the author strip. The +% boxes are separated by \cs{author@bx@sep} plus two +% \cs{author@bx@sep} margins. This means that each box must be of +% width $(\cs{textwidth}-\cs{author@bx@sep})/N-\cs{author@bx@sep}$, +% where $N$ is the number of boxes per row. +% \begin{macrocode} + \author@bx@wd=\columnwidth\relax + \advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax + \ifnum\@ACM@authorsperrow>0\relax + \divide\author@bx@wd by \@ACM@authorsperrow\relax + \else + \ifcase\num@authorgroups + \relax % 0? + \or % 1=one author per row + \else % 2=two authors per row + \divide\author@bx@wd by 2\relax + \fi + \fi + \advance\author@bx@wd by -\author@bx@sep\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% Now, parsing of \cs{addresses}: +% \begin{macrocode} + \gdef\@currentauthors{}% + \gdef\@currentaffiliation{}% + \def\@author##1{\ifx\@currentauthors\@empty + \gdef\@currentauthors{\par##1}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{\par##1}% + \fi + \gdef\and{}}% + \def\email##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty + \gdef\@currentaffiliation{\href{mailto:##2}{##2}}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par\href{mailto:##2}{##2}}% + \fi}% + \def\affiliation##1##2{\ifx\@currentaffiliation\@empty + \gdef\@currentaffiliation{% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}\@ACM@resetaffil + ##2\@ACM@checkaffil}% + \else + \g@addto@macro\@currentaffiliation{\par + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{obeypunctuation=false}% + \setkeys{@ACM@affiliation@}{##1}\@ACM@resetaffil + ##2\@ACM@checkaffil}% + \fi + \global\let\and\@typeset@author@bx}% +% +% \end{macrocode} +% Actual typesetting is done by the \cs{and} macro +% \begin{macrocode} + \bgroup\hsize=\columnwidth + \par\raggedright\leftskip=\z@ + \lineskip=1pc\noindent + \addresses\let\and\@typeset@author@bx\and\par\bigskip\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkauthorsaddresses} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/27}{Introduced macro} +% \changes{v1.65}{2019/10/13}{Deleted cs{@addpunct}} +% \changes{v1.77}{2021/04/16}{New separator of institutions} +% \changes{v2.06}{2024/04/13}{\cs{streetaddress} and \cs{postcode} now +% produce warnings} +% \changes{v2.18}{2026/05/29}{Email is now clickable} +% Typesetting authors' addresses in the footnote style +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkauthorsaddresses{% + \ifnum\num@authors>1\relax + Authors' \else Author's \fi + Contact Information: + \bgroup + \def\streetaddress##1{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{ACM no longer collects + authors' postal addresses. I am ignoring your street + address}\unskip\ignorespaces}% + \def\postcode##1{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{ACM no longer collects + authors' postal addresses. I am ignoring your postal + code}\unskip\ignorespaces}% + \def\position##1{\unskip\ignorespaces}% + \gdef\@ACM@institution@separator{, }% + \def\institution##1{\unskip\@ACM@institution@separator ##1\gdef\@ACM@institution@separator{ and }}% + \def\city##1{\unskip, ##1}% + \def\state##1{\unskip, ##1}% + \renewcommand\department[2][0]{\unskip\@addpunct, ##2}% + \def\country##1{\unskip, ##1}% + \def\and{\unskip; \gdef\@ACM@institution@separator{, }}% + \def\@author##1{##1}% + \def\email##1##2{\unskip, \href{mailto:##2}{##2}}% + \addresses + \egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{1.66}{2019/12/18}{Added warning for missing addresses} +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndDocument{\if@ACM@nonacm\else\if@ACM@journal + \ifx\@authorsaddresses\@empty + \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{Authors' + addresses are mandatory for ACM journals}% + \fi\fi\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@setaddresses} +% This is an |amsart| macro that we do not need. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@setaddresses{} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@authornotemark} +% \changes{v2.15}{2025/08/16}{Suppressed spurious overfull warning} +% Adding a footnote mark to authors. This version adds a ``normal'' +% footnote mark. Note that since we typeset the author in a box, we +% get superflous box overfull; to protect against it we increase +% |\hfuzz| +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@authornotemark{\g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{% + \advance\hfuzz by 5pt\relax\footnotemark\relax}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@authornotemark} +% \changes{v1.39}{2017/05/14}{Added macro} +% \changes{v2.15}{2025/08/16}{Suppressed spurious overfull warning} +% Adding a footnote mark to authors with a given number +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@@authornotemark#1{\g@addto@macro\@currentauthors{% + \advance\hfuzz by 5pt\relax\footnotemark[#1]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkteasers} +% Typesetting the teasers +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/11/1}{Added check for description} +% \changes{v1.78}{2021/05/16}{Unboxing \cs{mktitle@bx}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkteasers{% + \ifx\@teaserfigures\@empty\else + \def\@teaser##1{\par\bigskip\bgroup + \captionsetup{type=figure}##1\egroup\par} + \global\setbox\mktitle@bx=\vbox{\noindent\unvbox\mktitle@bx\par + \noindent\@Description@presentfalse + \@teaserfigures\par\if@Description@present\else + \global\@undescribed@imagestrue + \ClassWarning{\@classname}{A possible image without + description}\fi + \medskip}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkabstract} +% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'Abstract' in PDF bookmarks +% (Matthew Fluet)} +% \changes{v1.20}{2016/08/03}{Deleted spurious space} +% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Removed spurious indentation (John +% Wickerson)} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Removed spurious indentation if abstract +% is followed by an empty line} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{I13n} +% Typesetting the abstract +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkabstract{\bgroup + \ifx\@abstract\@lempty\else + {\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\abstractname}% + \if@ACM@journal + \everypar{\setbox\z@\lastbox\everypar{}}\small + \else + \section*{\abstractname}% + \fi + \ignorespaces\@abstract\par}% + \fi\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mktranslatedabstract} +% \changes{v1.83}{2022/02/20}{Added macro} +% Typesetting a translated abstract +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mktranslatedabstract#1{\selectlanguage{#1}% + \if@ACM@journal + \everypar{\setbox\z@\lastbox\everypar{}}\small + \else + \section*{\abstractname}% + \fi + \ignorespaces} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mkbibcitation} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Changed format for sigs} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Added \cs{nobreak}} +% \changes{v1.31}{2017/03/04}{Disabled linebreak} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/09}{Deleted DOI from doi numbers} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{If the paper has just one page, use +% `page' instead of `pages'} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/25}{Added subtitle} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/06/10}{Bug corrected (Ross Moore)} +% \changes{v1.55}{2018/07/25}{Bug corrected} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Deleted spurious \cs{vspace} warning} +% Print the |bibcitation| format +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mkbibcitation{\bgroup + \let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig + \def\@pages@word{\ifnum\getrefnumber{TotPages}=1\relax page\else pages\fi}% + \def\footnotemark{}% + \def\\{\unskip{} \ignorespaces}% + \def\footnote{\ClassError{\@classname}{Please do not use footnotes + inside a \string\title{} or \string\author{} command! Use + \string\titlenote{} or \string\authornote{} instead!}}% + \def\@article@string{\ifx\@acmArticle\@empty{\ }\else, + Article~\@acmArticle\ \fi}% + \par\medskip\small\noindent{\bfseries ACM Reference Format:}\par\nobreak + \noindent\bgroup + \def\\{\unskip{}, \ignorespaces}\authors\egroup. \@acmYear. \@title + \ifx\@subtitle\@empty. \else: \@subtitle. \fi + \if@ACM@nonacm\else + % The 'nonacm' option disables 'printacmref' by default, + % and the present \@mkbibcitation definition is never used + % in this case. The conditional remains useful if the user + % explicitly sets \settopmatter{printacmref=true}. + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip + \textit{\@journalNameShort} + \@acmVolume, \@acmNumber \@article@string (\@acmPubDate), + \ref{TotPages}~\@pages@word. + \else + In \textit{\@acmBooktitle}% + \ifx\@acmEditors\@empty\textit{.}\else + \andify\@acmEditors\textit{, }\@acmEditors~\@editorsAbbrev.% + \fi\ + ACM, New York, NY, USA% + \@article@string\unskip, \ref{TotPages}~\@pages@word. + \fi + \fi + \ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi +\par\egroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@printendtopmatter} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Made it \cs{par}\cs{bigskip} uniformly} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Deleted spurious \cs{vspace} warning} +% \changes{v1.69}{2020/02/02}{Deleted grouping} +% End the top matter +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@printendtopmatter{% + \let\@vspace\@vspace@orig + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@orig + \par\bigskip + \let\@vspace\@vspace@acm + \let\@vspacer\@vspacer@acm + } +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@setthanks} +% We redefine \cs{\@setthanks} using \cs{long} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@setthanks{\long\def\thanks##1{\par##1\@addpunct.}\thankses} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@setauthorsaddresses} +% \changes{v1.46}{2018/08/25}{Introduced macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@setauthorsaddresses{\@authorsaddresses\unskip\@addpunct.} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@typesetengagemetadata} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Introduced macro} +% Typesetting special metadata for ACM Engage +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@typesetengagemetadata{% + \def\@setengagemetadata##1##2{\par\noindent\textbf{##1} ##2\par}% + \@acmengagemetadata} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Headers and Footers} +%\label{sec:head_foot} +% +% We use |fancyhdr| for our headers and footers: +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{fancyhdr} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@restore@pagestyle} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/07/30}{Added macro} +% The following code by Ross Moore protects against changes by +% the |totpages| package: +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ACM@ps@plain\ps@plain +\let\ACM@ps@myheadings\ps@myheadings +\let\ACM@ps@headings\ps@headings +\def\ACM@restore@pagestyle{% + \let\ps@plain\ACM@ps@plain + \let\ps@myheadings\ACM@ps@myheadings + \let\ps@headings\ACM@ps@headings} +\AtBeginDocument{\ACM@restore@pagestyle} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@linecount@bx} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/10}{Rulers now are continuous} +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/05/27}{Work around a bug in xcolor: looks like +% cmyk colors in boxes do not work} +% \changes{v1.46}{2017/08/28}{Rearranged the code to get rid of +% spurious underfull messages (Benjamin Byholm)} +% \changes{v1.64}{2019/08/24}{Bug fix: made the spacing on the left +% and the right size equal} +% This is the box displayed in review mode +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@review + \newsavebox{\ACM@linecount@bx} + \newlength\ACM@linecount@bxht + \newcount\ACM@linecount + \ACM@linecount\@ne\relax + \def\ACM@mk@linecount{% + \savebox{\ACM@linecount@bx}[4em][t]{\parbox[t]{4em}{\normalfont + \normalsize + \setlength{\ACM@linecount@bxht}{0pt}% + \loop{\color{red}\scriptsize\the\ACM@linecount}\\ + \global\advance\ACM@linecount by \@ne + \addtolength{\ACM@linecount@bxht}{\baselineskip}% + \ifdim\ACM@linecount@bxht<\textheight\repeat + {\color{red}\scriptsize\the\ACM@linecount}\hfill + \global\advance\ACM@linecount by \@ne}}} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@linecountL} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Renamed macro} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/10}{Rulers now are continuous} +% How to display the box on the left +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ACM@linecountL{% + \if@ACM@review + \ACM@mk@linecount + \begin{picture}(0,0)% + \put(-26,-22){\usebox{\ACM@linecount@bx}}% + \end{picture}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@linecountR} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.34}{2017/04/10}{Rulers now are continuous} +% \changes{v1.69}{2020/02/02}{Do not increase numbers in one column format} +% \changes{1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% How to display the box on the right. In one column formats we do +% not step the numbers. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ACM@linecountR{% + \if@ACM@review + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \relax + \or % acmsmall + \relax + \or % acmlarge + \relax + \or % acmtog + \ACM@mk@linecount + \or % sigconf + \ACM@mk@linecount + \or % siggraph + \ACM@mk@linecount + \or % sigplan + \ACM@mk@linecount + \or % sigchi + \ACM@mk@linecount + \or % sigchi-a + \ACM@mk@linecount + \or % acmengage + \ACM@mk@linecount + \or % acmcp + \relax + \fi + \begin{picture}(0,0)% + \put(20,-22){\usebox{\ACM@linecount@bx}}% + \end{picture}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@timestamp} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added macro (Michael D.~Adams)} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/28}{Added current page number} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added submission id} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Fromatting change (Michael D.~Adams)} +% The timestamp system +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@timestamp + % Subtracting 30 from \time gives us the effect of rounding down despite + % \numexpr rounding to nearest + \newcounter{ACM@time@hours} + \setcounter{ACM@time@hours}{\numexpr (\time - 30) / 60 \relax} + \newcounter{ACM@time@minutes} + \setcounter{ACM@time@minutes}{\numexpr \time - \theACM@time@hours * 60 \relax} + \newcommand\ACM@timestamp{% + \footnotesize% + \ifx\@acmSubmissionID\@empty\relax\else + Submission ID: \@acmSubmissionID.{ }% + \fi + \the\year-\two@digits{\the\month}-\two@digits{\the\day}{ }% + \two@digits{\theACM@time@hours}:\two@digits{\theACM@time@minutes}{. }% + Page \thepage\ of \@startPage--\pageref*{TotPages}.% + } +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@shortauthors} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{Introduced macro} +% \changes{v1.54}{2016/06/23}{Added submission id in anonymous mode} +% Even if the author redefined \cs{shortauthors}, we do not print +% it in the headers when in anonymous mode: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@shortauthors{% + \if@ACM@anonymous + Anon. + \ifx\@acmSubmissionID\@empty\else Submission Id: \@acmSubmissionID\fi + \else\shortauthors\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@headfootfont} +% \changes{v1.16}{2016/07/07}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.48}{2017/09/16}{Deleted unnecessary switch (Michael D.~Adams)} +% \changes{v1.60}{2019/04/22}{Moved to footnotesize} +% The font to typeset header and footer text. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@headfootfont{\sffamily\footnotesize} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{standardpagestyle} +% \changes{v1.10}{2016/05/22}{Reversed folios location} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Suppressed folios if sig} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Added headers for sigs} +% \changes{v1.13}{2016/06/06}{Expanded headers for sigchi-a} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/04}{Better handling of anonymous mode} +% \changes{v1.16}{2016/07/07}{Customize header/footer text font} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Added paper title to sigs} +% \changes{v1.29}{2017/01/22}{Corrected printfolios (Matthew Fluet)} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added timestamp (Michael D.~Adams)} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added right linecount for two-column formats} +% The page style for all pages but the first one +% \changes{v1.51}{2018/04/05}{We now use journal abbreviation for +% footers} +% \changes{v1.59}{2019/04/20}{Added logic for conference papers using +% journal format} +% \changes{v1.59}{2019/04/20}{Moved page styles to \cs{AtBeginDocument}} +% \changes{v1.76}{2021/02/21}{Fixed bug with no line numbers for +% nonacm} +% \changes{v1.86}{2022/06/26}{Special treatment of ACM Engage materials} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/14}{Special treatment of ACMCP} +% \changes{v1.91}{2023/06/22}{Redesigned ACMP labels} +% \changes{v2.03}{2024/02/04}{Special treatment of ACM TOG} +% The page style for all pages but the first one +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +\fancypagestyle{standardpagestyle}{% + \fancyhf{}% + \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{\z@}% + \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{\z@}% + \def\@acmArticlePage{% + \ifx\@acmArticle\empty% + \if@ACM@printfolios\thepage\fi% + \else% + \@acmArticle\if@ACM@printfolios:\thepage\fi% + \fi% + }% + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@tog + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\if@ACM@printfolios\thepage\fi}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\if@ACM@printfolios\thepage\fi}% + \fancyhead[RE]{\@shortauthors}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\shorttitle}% + \if@ACM@nonacm\else% + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize Manuscript submitted to ACM} + \fi% + \or % acmsmall + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\@acmArticlePage}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont\@acmArticlePage}% + \fancyhead[RE]{\@headfootfont\@shortauthors}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\shorttitle}% + \if@ACM@nonacm\else% + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalNameShort, Vol. \@acmVolume, No. + \@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date: \@acmPubDate.}% + \fi + \or % acmlarge + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont + \@acmArticlePage\quad\textbullet\quad\@shortauthors}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont + \shorttitle\quad\textbullet\quad\@acmArticlePage}% + \if@ACM@nonacm\else% + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalNameShort, Vol. \@acmVolume, No. + \@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date: \@acmPubDate.}% + \fi + \or % acmtog + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont + \@acmArticlePage\quad\textbullet\quad\@shortauthors}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL}% + \fancyhead[RE]{\ACM@linecountR}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont + \shorttitle\quad\textbullet\quad\@acmArticlePage\ACM@linecountR}% + \if@ACM@nonacm\else + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalNameShort, + Vol. \@acmVolume, No.~\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. + Publication date: \@acmPubDate.}% + \else + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \acmConference@shortname, + \acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue.}% + \fi + \fi + \else % Proceedings + \fancyfoot[C]{\if@ACM@printfolios\footnotesize\thepage\fi}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\shorttitle}% + \fancyhead[RE]{\@headfootfont\@shortauthors\ACM@linecountR}% + \if@ACM@nonacm + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\ACM@linecountR}% + \else% + \if@ACM@engage + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\footnotesize + EngageCSEdu. \ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont + EngageCSEdu. \ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi + \ACM@linecountR}% + \else + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\footnotesize + \acmConference@shortname, + \acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont + \acmConference@shortname, + \acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue\ACM@linecountR}% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \else % Proceedings + \fancyfoot[C]{\if@ACM@printfolios\footnotesize\thepage\fi}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont\shorttitle}% + \fancyhead[RE]{\@headfootfont\@shortauthors\ACM@linecountR}% + \if@ACM@nonacm + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\ACM@linecountR}% + \else% + \if@ACM@engage + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont + EngageCSEdu. \ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont + EngageCSEdu. \ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi + \ACM@linecountR}% + \else + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@headfootfont + \acmConference@shortname, + \acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@headfootfont + \acmConference@shortname, + \acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue\ACM@linecountR}% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \if@ACM@sigchiamode + \fancyheadoffset[L]{\dimexpr(\marginparsep+\marginparwidth)}% + \fi + \if@ACM@timestamp + \fancyfoot[LO,RE]{\ACM@timestamp} + \fi + \if@ACM@acmcp + \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0.1\p@}% + \fancyheadoffset[L]{46pt}% + \fancyhead[L]{\makebox[\z@][l]{% + \raisebox{-\dimexpr(0.2\textheight*(\ACM@ArticleType@nr-2))}{% + \rotatebox{90}{\colorbox{@ACM@Article@color}{\color{white}% + \strut\ACM@ArticleType~Article}}}}% + \ACM@linecountL}% + \fancyhead[R]{\makebox[\z@][r]{\box\@ACM@acmcpbox}}% + \fancyfoot[L,C]{}% + \fancyfoot[R]{\footnotesize + \@journalName, Volume~\@acmVolume, Issue~\@acmNumber, + \ifx\@acmArticle\@empty\else Article~\@acmArticle\fi\space + (\@acmPubDate)\ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\\\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi} + \fi +}% +\pagestyle{standardpagestyle} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@folio@wd} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Obsoleted macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@folio@ht} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Obsoleted macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@folio@voffset} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Obsoleted macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@folio@max} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Obsoleted macro} +% Folio blob width, height, offsets and max number +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@folioblob} +% \changes{v1.44}{2017/08/11}{Suppress the blob if acmArticleSeq is empty} +% \changes{v1.45}{2017/08/15}{Switched \cs{bfeseries}\cs{sffamily} to +% \cs{sffamily}\cs{bfseries}} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Obsoleted macro} +% The macro to typeset the folio blob. +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \begin{macro}{firstpagestyle} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/10}{Added timestamp (Michael D.~Adams)} +% \changes{v1.33}{2017/03/29}{Added right linecount for two-column +% formats} +% \changes{v1.51}{2018/04/05}{We now use journal abbreviation for +% footers} +% \changes{v1.59}{2019/04/20}{Added logic for conference papers using +% journal format} +% \changes{v1.59}{2019/04/20}{Moved page styles to \cs{AtBeginDocument}} +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/14}{Special treatment for acmcp} +% \changes{v1.89}{2022/12/27}{Moved badges here} +% \changes{v2.00}{2023/10/22}{Deleted blobs} +% \changes{v2.03}{2024/02/04}{Special treatment of tog} +% The page style for the first page only. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +\fancypagestyle{firstpagestyle}{% + \fancyhf{}% + \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{\z@}% + \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{\z@}% + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip@or@tog + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \fancyhead[L]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[R]{\@acmBadgeR}% + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\if@ACM@printfolios\small\thepage\fi}% + \if@ACM@nonacm\else% + \fancyfoot[RE,LO]{\footnotesize Manuscript submitted to ACM}% + \fi% + \or % acmsmall + \if@ACM@nonacm\else% + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalNameShort, Vol. \@acmVolume, No. + \@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date: + \@acmPubDate.}% + \fi% + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@acmBadgeR}% + \fancyhead[RE]{\@acmBadgeR}% + \or % acmlarge + \if@ACM@nonacm\else% + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalNameShort, Vol. \@acmVolume, No. + \@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. Publication date: + \@acmPubDate.}% + \fi% + \fancyhead[RO]{\@acmBadgeR}% + \fancyhead[RE]{\@acmBadgeR}% + \fancyhead[LE]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[LO]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \or % acmtog + \if@ACM@nonacm\else% + \if@ACM@journal@bibstrip + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \@journalNameShort, + Vol. \@acmVolume, No.~\@acmNumber, Article \@acmArticle. + Publication date: \@acmPubDate.}% + \else + \fancyfoot[RO,LE]{\footnotesize \acmConference@shortname, + \acmConference@date, \acmConference@venue.}% + \fi + \fi% + \fancyhead[L]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[R]{\@acmBadgeR\ACM@linecountR}% + \else % Conference proceedings + \fancyhead[L]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[R]{\@acmBadgeR\ACM@linecountR}% + \fancyfoot[C]{\if@ACM@printfolios\footnotesize\thepage\fi}% + \fi + \else + \fancyhead[L]{\ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[R]{\@acmBadgeR\ACM@linecountR}% + \fancyfoot[C]{\if@ACM@printfolios\footnotesize\thepage\fi}% + \fi + \if@ACM@timestamp + \ifnum\ACM@format@nr=0\relax % Manuscript + \fancyfoot[LO,RE]{\ACM@timestamp\quad + \if@ACM@nonacm\else + \footnotesize Manuscript submitted to ACM + \fi} + \else + \fancyfoot[LO,RE]{\ACM@timestamp} + \fi + \fi + \if@ACM@acmcp + \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0.1\p@}% + \fancyheadoffset[L]{46pt}% + \fancyhead[L]{\makebox[\z@][l]{% + \raisebox{-\dimexpr(0.2\textheight*(\ACM@ArticleType@nr-2))}{% + \rotatebox{90}{\colorbox{@ACM@Article@color}{\color{white}% + \strut\ACM@ArticleType~Article}}}}% + \ACM@linecountL\@acmBadgeL}% + \fancyhead[R]{\@acmBadgeR\makebox[\z@][r]{\box\@ACM@acmcpbox}}% + \fancyfoot[L,C]{}% + \fancyfoot[R]{\footnotesize + \@journalName, Volume~\@acmVolume, Issue~\@acmNumber, + \ifx\@acmArticle\@empty\else Article~\@acmArticle\fi\space + (\@acmPubDate)\ifx\@acmDOI\@empty\else\\\@formatdoi{\@acmDOI}\fi} + \fi +}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Sectioning} +%\label{sec:sectioninng} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@NRadjust} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/06/17}{Added macro} +% Ross Moore's macro. +% \begin{quotation} +% Initially |\ACM@sect@format@| just passes through its |#1| +% argument unchanged. +% When a sectioning macro such as |\section| occurs, the +% |\ACM@NRadjust| redefines |\ACM@sect@format@| to expand into the +% styling commands; e.g., |\@secfont|. +% Then |\Sectionformat| is temporarily redefined to produce +% |\realSectionformat{\ACM@sect@format{#1}}{#2}|, which ultimately +% becomes |\Sectionformat{\@secfont{#1}}{#2}|. +% This is done to allow |\Sectionformat| to be variable, as may be +% needed in particular circumstances. Its current expansion is saved +% as |\realSectionformat| which is used with the modified 1st argument, +% then |\Sectionformat| is reverted to its former expansion. +% +% To style the section-number, the line |#1{}| is used at the end of +% |\ACM@NRadjust|. This imposes style-changing commands for fonts and +% sizes, but any |\MakeUppercase| acts on just the |{}|. It's a bit hacky, +% by essentially assuming that only numbers occur here, not letters to +% be case-changed. (This should be acceptable in a class-file, as it +% ought to be possible to change the case elsewhere, if that was ever +% desired.) Also, it can result in |\@adddotafter| being called too +% soon, so a slight adjustment is made, via |\ACM@adddotafter|, which +% now tests whether its argument is empty. But the coding has to allow +% for other packages to have also patched |\@adddotafter|. +% \end{quotation} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ACM@NRadjust#1{% + \begingroup + \expandafter\ifx\csname Sectionformat\endcsname\relax + % do nothing when \Sectionformat is unknown + \def\next{\endgroup #1}% + \else + \def\next{\endgroup + \let\realSectionformat\Sectionformat + \def\ACM@sect@format@{#1}% + \let\Sectionformat\ACM@NR@adjustedSectionformat + %% next lines added 2018-06-17 to ensure section number is styled + \let\real@adddotafter\@adddotafter + \let\@adddotafter\ACM@adddotafter + #1{}% imposes the styles, but nullifies \MakeUppercase + \let\@adddotafter\real@adddotafter + }% + \fi \next +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@NR@adjustedSectionformat} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/06/17}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ACM@NR@adjustedSectionformat#1#2{% + \realSectionformat{\ACM@sect@format{#1}}{#2}% + \let\Sectionformat\realSectionformat} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\ACM@sect@format}{\ACM@sect@format@} +\def\ACM@sect@format@null#1{#1} +\let\ACM@sect@format@\ACM@sect@format@null +\AtBeginDocument{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname LTX@adddotafter\endcsname\relax + \let\LTX@adddotafter\@adddotafter + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@adddotafter} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/06/17}{Added macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ACM@adddotafter#1{\ifx\relax#1\relax\else\LTX@adddotafter{#1}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/05/27}{Deleted indent for subsubsection} +% \changes{v1.54}{2018/06/17}{Added Ross's patch for sectioning} +% \changes{v1.68}{2020/01/19}{New command for unindent paras} +% \changes{v1.69}{2020/02/02}{No dots for unindented paragraphs} +% Sectioning is different for different levels +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\section{\def\@toclevel{1}% + \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}% + {-.75\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}% + {.25\baselineskip}% + {\ACM@NRadjust\@secfont}} +\renewcommand\subsection{\def\@toclevel{2}% + \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}% + {-.75\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}% + {.25\baselineskip}% + {\ACM@NRadjust\@subsecfont}} +\renewcommand\subsubsection{\def\@toclevel{3}% + \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}% + {-.5\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}% + {-3.5\p@}% + {\ACM@NRadjust{\@subsubsecfont\@adddotafter}}} +\renewcommand\paragraph{\def\@toclevel{4}% + \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\parindent}% + {-.5\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}% + {-3.5\p@}% + {\ACM@NRadjust{\@parfont\@adddotafter}}} +\newcommand\noindentparagraph{\def\@toclevel{4}% + \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}% + {-.5\baselineskip \@plus -2\p@ \@minus -.2\p@}% + {-3.5\p@}% + {\ACM@NRadjust{\@parfont}}} +\renewcommand\part{\def\@toclevel{9}% + \@startsection{part}{9}{\z@}% + {-10\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -2\p@}% + {4\p@}% + {\ACM@NRadjust\@parfont}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\section@raggedright} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Introduced macro}% +% Special version of \cs{raggedright} compatible with +% \cs{MakeUppercase} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\section@raggedright{\@rightskip\@flushglue + \rightskip\@rightskip + \leftskip\z@skip + \parindent\z@} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@secfont} +% \begin{macro}{\@subsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\@subsubsecfont} +% \begin{macro}{\@parfont} +% \changes{v1.12}{2016/05/30}{Moved to \cs{section@raggedright}}% +% \changes{v1.40}{2017/06/04}{Switched to MakeTextUppercase} +% \changes{v1.45}{2017/08/15}{Switched \cs{bfeseries}\cs{sffamily} to +% \cs{sffamily}\cs{bfseries}} +% \changes{v1.67}{2020/01/11}{Deleted redefinitions of sections} +% \changes{v1.85}{2022/05/08}{Added: acmengage} +% \changes{v2.08}{2024/05/27}{Deleted uppercasing} +% Fonts for sections etc. are different for different formats. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright} +\def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright} +\def\@subsubsecfont{\sffamily\itshape} +\def\@parfont{\itshape} +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge + \def\@secfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright} +\or % acmtog + \def\@secfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\large\section@raggedright} +\or % sigconf + \def\@secfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright} +\or % siggraph + \def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright} +\or % sigplan + \def\@secfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\bfseries\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsubsecfont{\bfseries\section@raggedright} + \def\@parfont{\bfseries\itshape} + \def\@subparfont{\itshape} +\or % sigchi + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{1} + \def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright} +\or % sigchi-a + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} + \def\@secfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\sffamily\bfseries\section@raggedright} +\or % acmengage + \def\@secfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright} + \def\@subsecfont{\bfseries\Large\section@raggedright} +\or %acmcp +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v2.10}{2024/10/19}{Added tocindent for paragraphs and +% subparagraphs} +% Amasat does not define tocindents for paragraphs and subparagraphs. +% Here we add them +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@for\@tempa:=-1,0,1,2,3,4,5\do{% + \@ifundefined{r@tocindent\@tempa}{% + \@xp\gdef\csname r@tocindent\@tempa\endcsname{0pt}}{}% + }% +} +\def\@writetocindents{% + \begingroup + \@for\@tempa:=-1,0,1,2,3,4,5\do{% + \immediate\write\@auxout{% + \string\newlabel{tocindent\@tempa}{% + \csname r@tocindent\@tempa\endcsname}}% + }% + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@adddotafter} +% Add punctuation after a sectioning command +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@adddotafter#1{#1\@addpunct{.}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@addspaceafter} +% Add space after a sectioning command +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@addspaceafter#1{#1\@addpunct{\enspace}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.87}{2022/08/14}{No numbering sections for ACMCP} +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@ACM@acmcp + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +%\subsection{TOC lists} +%\label{sec:tocs} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep} +% Related to the \cs{tableofcontents} are all the horizontal fillers. Base +% \LaTeX\ defines \cs{@dottedtocline}, which we should not disable. Yet, this +% command expects \cs{@dotsep} to be defined but leaves this to the class +% implementation. Since |amsart| does not provide this, we copy the standard +% variant from |article| here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand*\@dotsep{4.5} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +%\subsection{Theorems} +%\label{sec:theorems} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainbodyfont} +% The font to typeset the body of the |acmplain| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmplainbodyfont{\itshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainindent} +% The amount to indent the |acmplain| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmplainindent{\parindent} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainheadfont} +% The font to typeset the head of the |acmplain| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmplainheadfont{\scshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmplainnotefont} +% The font to typeset the note of the |acmplain| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmplainnotefont{\@empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% Customization of the |acmplain| theorem style: +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog +\or % sigconf +\or % siggraph +\or % sigplan + \def\@acmplainbodyfont{\itshape} + \def\@acmplainindent{\z@} + \def\@acmplainheadfont{\bfseries} + \def\@acmplainnotefont{\normalfont} +\or % sigchi +\or % sigchi-a +\or % acmengage +\or % acmcp +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{acmplain} +% The |acmplain| theorem style +% \begin{macrocode} +\newtheoremstyle{acmplain}% + {.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip + \@minus.2\baselineskip}% space above + {.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip + \@minus.2\baselineskip}% space below + {\@acmplainbodyfont}% body font + {\@acmplainindent}% indent amount + {\@acmplainheadfont}% head font + {.}% punctuation after head + {.5em}% spacing after head + {\thmname{#1}\thmnumber{ #2}\thmnote{ {\@acmplainnotefont(#3)}}}% head spec +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionbodyfont} +% The font to typeset the body of the |acmdefinition| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmdefinitionbodyfont{\normalfont} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionindent} +% The amount to indent the |acmdefinition| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmdefinitionindent{\parindent} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionheadfont} +% The font to typeset the head of the |acmdefinition| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmdefinitionheadfont{\itshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@acmdefinitionnotefont} +% The font to typeset the note of the |acmdefinition| theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@acmdefinitionnotefont{\@empty} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% Customization of the |acmdefinition| theorem style: +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog +\or % sigconf +\or % siggraph +\or % sigplan + \def\@acmdefinitionbodyfont{\normalfont} + \def\@acmdefinitionindent{\z@} + \def\@acmdefinitionheadfont{\bfseries} + \def\@acmdefinitionnotefont{\normalfont} +\or % sigchi +\or % sigchi-a +\or % acmengage +\or % acmcp +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{acmdefinition} +% The |acmdefinition| theorem style +% \begin{macrocode} +\newtheoremstyle{acmdefinition}% + {.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip + \@minus.2\baselineskip}% space above + {.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip + \@minus.2\baselineskip}% space below + {\@acmdefinitionbodyfont}% body font + {\@acmdefinitionindent}% indent amount + {\@acmdefinitionheadfont}% head font + {.}% punctuation after head + {.5em}% spacing after head + {\thmname{#1}\thmnumber{ #2}\thmnote{ {\@acmdefinitionnotefont(#3)}}}% head spec +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% Make |acmplain| the default theorem style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\theoremstyle{acmplain} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Delay defining the theorem environments until after other packages +% have been loaded. In particular, the |cleveref| package must be +% loaded before the theorem environments are defined in order to show +% the correct environment name (see +% \url{https://github.com/borisveytsman/acmart/issues/138}). The |acmthm| +% option is used to suppress the definition of any theorem +% environments. Also, to avoid obscure errors arising from these +% environment definitions conflicting with environments defined by the +% user or by user-loaded packages, we only define environments that +% have not yet been defined. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndPreamble{% + \if@ACM@acmthm + \theoremstyle{acmplain} + \@ifundefined{theorem}{% + \newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section] + }{} + \@ifundefined{conjecture}{% + \newtheorem{conjecture}[theorem]{Conjecture} + }{} + \@ifundefined{proposition}{% + \newtheorem{proposition}[theorem]{Proposition} + }{} + \@ifundefined{lemma}{% + \newtheorem{lemma}[theorem]{Lemma} + }{} + \@ifundefined{corollary}{% + \newtheorem{corollary}[theorem]{Corollary} + }{} + \theoremstyle{acmdefinition} + \@ifundefined{example}{% + \newtheorem{example}[theorem]{Example} + }{} + \@ifundefined{definition}{% + \newtheorem{definition}[theorem]{Definition} + }{} + \fi + \theoremstyle{acmplain} +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@proofnamefont} +% The font to typeset the proof name. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@proofnamefont{\scshape} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@proofindent} +% Whether or not to indent proofs. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@proofindent{\indent} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% Customization of the proof environment. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ifcase\ACM@format@nr +\relax % manuscript +\or % acmsmall +\or % acmlarge +\or % acmtog +\or % sigconf +\or % siggraph +\or % sigplan + \def\@proofnamefont{\itshape} + \def\@proofindent{\noindent} +\or % sigchi +\or % sigchi-a +\or % acmengage +\or % acmcp +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{proof} +% We want some customization of the proof environment. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewenvironment{proof}[1][\proofname]{\par + \pushQED{\qed}% + \normalfont \topsep6\p@\@plus6\p@\relax + \trivlist + \item[\@proofindent\hskip\labelsep + {\@proofnamefont #1\@addpunct{.}}]\ignorespaces +}{% + \popQED\endtrivlist\@endpefalse +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +%\subsection{Balancing columns} +%\label{sec:balancing} +% +% We need balancing only if the user did not disable it, and we use a +% two column format. Note that |pbalance| uses a different +% mechanism. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndPreamble{% + \if@ACM@pbalance + \global\@ACM@balancefalse + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \or % acmsmall + \or % acmlarge + \or % acmtog + \RequirePackage{pbalance}% + \or % sigconf + \RequirePackage{pbalance}% + \or % siggraph + \RequirePackage{pbalance}% + \or % sigplan + \RequirePackage{pbalance}% + \or % sigchi + \RequirePackage{pbalance}% + \or % sigchi-a + \or % acmengage + \RequirePackage{pbalance}% + \or % acmcp + \fi + \fi + \if@ACM@balance + \ifcase\ACM@format@nr + \relax % manuscript + \global\@ACM@balancefalse + \or % acmsmall + \global\@ACM@balancefalse + \or % acmlarge + \global\@ACM@balancefalse + \or % acmtog + \RequirePackage{balance}% + \or % sigconf + \RequirePackage{balance}% + \or % siggraph + \RequirePackage{balance}% + \or % sigplan + \RequirePackage{balance}% + \or % sigchi + \RequirePackage{balance}% + \or % sigchi-a + \global\@ACM@balancefalse + \or % acmengage + \RequirePackage{balance}% + \or % acmcp + \global\@ACM@balancefalse + \fi + \fi +} +\AtEndDocument{% + \if@ACM@balance + \if@twocolumn + \balance + \fi\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +%\subsection{Acknowledgments} +%\label{sec:acks} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acksname} +% \changes{v1.56}{2018/10/16}{Added macro (Philip Quinn)} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\acksname{Acknowledgments} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acks} +% \changes{v1.19}{2016/07/28}{Include 'Acknowledgements' in PDF bookmarks +% (Matthew Fluet)} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/05}{Added macro} +% This is a |comment|-like structure +% \begin{macrocode} +\specialcomment{acks}{% + \begingroup + \section*{\acksname} + \phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\acksname} +}{% + \endgroup +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\grantsponsor} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/05}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Renamed} +% We just typeset the name of the sponsor +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\grantsponsor#1#2#3{#2} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\grantnum} +% \changes{v1.15}{2016/07/05}{Added macro} +% \changes{v1.17}{2016/07/10}{Added url} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\grantnum[3][]{#3% + \def\@tempa{#1}\ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\space(\url{#1})\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Conditional typesetting} +% \label{sec:conditional} +% +% We use the |comment| package for conditional typesetting: +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndPreamble{% +\if@ACM@screen + \includecomment{screenonly} + \excludecomment{printonly} +\else + \excludecomment{screenonly} + \includecomment{printonly} +\fi +\if@ACM@anonymous + \excludecomment{anonsuppress} + \excludecomment{acks} +\else + \includecomment{anonsuppress} +\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +%\subsection{Additional bibliography commands} +%\label{sec:bibliography} +% +% \begin{macro}{\showeprint} +% \changes{v1.21}{2016/09/04}{Added macro} +% The command \cs{showeprint} has two arguments: the (optional) +% prefix and the eprint number. Right now the only prefix we understand is +% the (lowercase) word `arxiv'. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\showeprint[2][arxiv]{% + \def\@tempa{#1}% + \ifx\@tempa\@empty\def\@tempa{arxiv}\fi + \def\@tempb{arxiv}% + \ifx\@tempa\@tempb\relax + arXiv:\href{https://arxiv.org/abs/#2}{#2}% + \else + \def\@tempb{arXiv}% + \ifx\@tempa\@tempb\relax + arXiv:\href{https://arxiv.org/abs/#2}{#2}% + \else + #1:#2% + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +%\subsection{Index} +%\label{sec:index} +% +% \begin{macro}{\theindex} +% Standard |amsart| uses plain page style in index pages. This +% clashes with line numbering for |review| option, so we redefine it. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi + \columnseprule\z@ \columnsep 35\p@ + \@indextitlestyle + \let\item\@idxitem + \parindent\z@ \parskip\z@\@plus.3\p@\relax + \raggedright + \hyphenpenalty\@M + \footnotesize} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +%\subsection{End of Class} +%\label{end} +% +% \begin{macro}{\vspace} +% \changes{v1.57}{2018/12/16}{Added warning} +% \changes{v1.58}{2019/01/23}{Preserved old versions as +% \cs{@vspace@orig} and \cs{@vspace@orig}} +% \changes{1.69}{2020/02/02}{Added the changed command to avoid grouping} +% We do not disable \cs{vspace}, but add warning to it +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@vspace@orig=\@vspace +\let\@vspacer@orig=\@vspacer +\apptocmd{\@vspace}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{\string\vspace\space should + only be used to provide space above/below surrounding + objects}}{}{} +\apptocmd{\@vspacer}{\ClassWarning{\@classname}{\string\vspace\space should + only be used to provide space above/below surrounding + objects}}{}{} +\let\@vspace@acm=\@vspace +\let\@vspacer@acm=\@vspacer +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@origbaselinestretch} +% \changes{v1.57}{2018/12/16}{Added check whether the user changed +% \cs{baselinestretch}} +% We produce an error if the user tries to change \cs{baselinestretch} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ACM@origbaselinestretch\baselinestretch +\AtEndDocument{\ifx\baselinestretch\ACM@origbaselinestretch\else + \ClassError{\@classname}{An attempt to redefine + \string\baselinestretch\space detected. Please do not do this for + ACM submissions!}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@origsection} +% \changes{v2.14}{2025/05/30}{Added check whether the user changed +% \cs{section}} +% We produce an error if the user tries to change \cs{section} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ACM@origsection\section +\AtEndDocument{\ifx\section\ACM@origsection\else + \ClassError{\@classname}{An attempt to redefine + \string\section\space detected. Please do not do this for + ACM submissions!}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@origsubsection} +% \changes{v2.14}{2025/05/30}{Added check whether the user changed +% \cs{subsection}} +% We produce an error if the user tries to change \cs{subsection} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ACM@origsubsection\subsection +\AtEndDocument{\ifx\subsection\ACM@origsubsection\else + \ClassError{\@classname}{An attempt to redefine + \string\subsection\space detected. Please do not do this for + ACM submissions!}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@origsubsubsection} +% \changes{v2.14}{2025/05/30}{Added check whether the user changed +% \cs{subsubsection}} +% We produce an error if the user tries to change \cs{subsubsection} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ACM@origsubsubsection\subsubsection +\AtEndDocument{\ifx\subsubsection\ACM@origsubsubsection\else + \ClassError{\@classname}{An attempt to redefine + \string\subsubsection\space detected. Please do not do this for + ACM submissions!}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\ACM@origparagraph} +% \changes{v2.14}{2025/05/30}{Added check whether the user changed +% \cs{paragraph}} +% We produce an error if the user tries to change \cs{paragraph} +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\ACM@origparagraph\paragraph +\AtEndDocument{\ifx\paragraph\ACM@origparagraph\else + \ClassError{\@classname}{An attempt to redefine + \string\paragraph\space detected. Please do not do this for + ACM submissions!}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.30}{2017/02/10}{Added \cs{frenchspacing}} +% \begin{macrocode} +\normalsize\normalfont\frenchspacing +% +% \end{macrocode} +% +%\Finale +%\clearpage +% +%\PrintChanges +%\clearpage +%\PrintIndex +% +\endinput diff --git a/templates/iclr2026/fancyhdr.sty b/templates/iclr2026/fancyhdr.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 77ed4e3..0000000 --- a/templates/iclr2026/fancyhdr.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,485 +0,0 @@ -% fancyhdr.sty version 3.2 -% Fancy headers and footers for LaTeX. -% Piet van Oostrum, -% Dept of Computer and Information Sciences, University of Utrecht, -% Padualaan 14, P.O. Box 80.089, 3508 TB Utrecht, The Netherlands -% Telephone: +31 30 2532180. Email: piet@cs.uu.nl -% ======================================================================== -% LICENCE: -% This file may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public -% License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution. -% Either version 1 or, at your option, any later version. -% ======================================================================== -% MODIFICATION HISTORY: -% Sep 16, 1994 -% version 1.4: Correction for use with \reversemargin -% Sep 29, 1994: -% version 1.5: Added the \iftopfloat, \ifbotfloat and \iffloatpage commands -% Oct 4, 1994: -% version 1.6: Reset single spacing in headers/footers for use with -% setspace.sty or doublespace.sty -% Oct 4, 1994: -% version 1.7: changed \let\@mkboth\markboth to -% \def\@mkboth{\protect\markboth} to make it more robust -% Dec 5, 1994: -% version 1.8: corrections for amsbook/amsart: define \@chapapp and (more -% importantly) use the \chapter/sectionmark definitions from ps@headings if -% they exist (which should be true for all standard classes). -% May 31, 1995: -% version 1.9: The proposed \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{\iffloatpage... -% construction in the doc did not work properly with the fancyplain style. -% June 1, 1995: -% version 1.91: The definition of \@mkboth wasn't restored on subsequent -% \pagestyle{fancy}'s. -% June 1, 1995: -% version 1.92: The sequence \pagestyle{fancyplain} \pagestyle{plain} -% \pagestyle{fancy} would erroneously select the plain version. -% June 1, 1995: -% version 1.93: \fancypagestyle command added. -% Dec 11, 1995: -% version 1.94: suggested by Conrad Hughes -% CJCH, Dec 11, 1995: added \footruleskip to allow control over footrule -% position (old hardcoded value of .3\normalbaselineskip is far too high -% when used with very small footer fonts). -% Jan 31, 1996: -% version 1.95: call \@normalsize in the reset code if that is defined, -% otherwise \normalsize. -% this is to solve a problem with ucthesis.cls, as this doesn't -% define \@currsize. Unfortunately for latex209 calling \normalsize doesn't -% work as this is optimized to do very little, so there \@normalsize should -% be called. Hopefully this code works for all versions of LaTeX known to -% mankind. -% April 25, 1996: -% version 1.96: initialize \headwidth to a magic (negative) value to catch -% most common cases that people change it before calling \pagestyle{fancy}. -% Note it can't be initialized when reading in this file, because -% \textwidth could be changed afterwards. This is quite probable. -% We also switch to \MakeUppercase rather than \uppercase and introduce a -% \nouppercase command for use in headers. and footers. -% May 3, 1996: -% version 1.97: Two changes: -% 1. Undo the change in version 1.8 (using the pagestyle{headings} defaults -% for the chapter and section marks. The current version of amsbook and -% amsart classes don't seem to need them anymore. Moreover the standard -% latex classes don't use \markboth if twoside isn't selected, and this is -% confusing as \leftmark doesn't work as expected. -% 2. include a call to \ps@empty in ps@@fancy. This is to solve a problem -% in the amsbook and amsart classes, that make global changes to \topskip, -% which are reset in \ps@empty. Hopefully this doesn't break other things. -% May 7, 1996: -% version 1.98: -% Added % after the line \def\nouppercase -% May 7, 1996: -% version 1.99: This is the alpha version of fancyhdr 2.0 -% Introduced the new commands \fancyhead, \fancyfoot, and \fancyhf. -% Changed \headrulewidth, \footrulewidth, \footruleskip to -% macros rather than length parameters, In this way they can be -% conditionalized and they don't consume length registers. There is no need -% to have them as length registers unless you want to do calculations with -% them, which is unlikely. Note that this may make some uses of them -% incompatible (i.e. if you have a file that uses \setlength or \xxxx=) -% May 10, 1996: -% version 1.99a: -% Added a few more % signs -% May 10, 1996: -% version 1.99b: -% Changed the syntax of \f@nfor to be resistent to catcode changes of := -% Removed the [1] from the defs of \lhead etc. because the parameter is -% consumed by the \@[xy]lhead etc. macros. -% June 24, 1997: -% version 1.99c: -% corrected \nouppercase to also include the protected form of \MakeUppercase -% \global added to manipulation of \headwidth. -% \iffootnote command added. -% Some comments added about \@fancyhead and \@fancyfoot. -% Aug 24, 1998 -% version 1.99d -% Changed the default \ps@empty to \ps@@empty in order to allow -% \fancypagestyle{empty} redefinition. -% Oct 11, 2000 -% version 2.0 -% Added LPPL license clause. -% -% A check for \headheight is added. An errormessage is given (once) if the -% header is too large. Empty headers don't generate the error even if -% \headheight is very small or even 0pt. -% Warning added for the use of 'E' option when twoside option is not used. -% In this case the 'E' fields will never be used. -% -% Mar 10, 2002 -% version 2.1beta -% New command: \fancyhfoffset[place]{length} -% defines offsets to be applied to the header/footer to let it stick into -% the margins (if length > 0). -% place is like in fancyhead, except that only E,O,L,R can be used. -% This replaces the old calculation based on \headwidth and the marginpar -% area. -% \headwidth will be dynamically calculated in the headers/footers when -% this is used. -% -% Mar 26, 2002 -% version 2.1beta2 -% \fancyhfoffset now also takes h,f as possible letters in the argument to -% allow the header and footer widths to be different. -% New commands \fancyheadoffset and \fancyfootoffset added comparable to -% \fancyhead and \fancyfoot. -% Errormessages and warnings have been made more informative. -% -% Dec 9, 2002 -% version 2.1 -% The defaults for \footrulewidth, \plainheadrulewidth and -% \plainfootrulewidth are changed from \z@skip to 0pt. In this way when -% someone inadvertantly uses \setlength to change any of these, the value -% of \z@skip will not be changed, rather an errormessage will be given. - -% March 3, 2004 -% Release of version 3.0 - -% Oct 7, 2004 -% version 3.1 -% Added '\endlinechar=13' to \fancy@reset to prevent problems with -% includegraphics in header when verbatiminput is active. - -% March 22, 2005 -% version 3.2 -% reset \everypar (the real one) in \fancy@reset because spanish.ldf does -% strange things with \everypar between << and >>. - -\def\ifancy@mpty#1{\def\temp@a{#1}\ifx\temp@a\@empty} - -\def\fancy@def#1#2{\ifancy@mpty{#2}\fancy@gbl\def#1{\leavevmode}\else - \fancy@gbl\def#1{#2\strut}\fi} - -\let\fancy@gbl\global - -\def\@fancyerrmsg#1{% - \ifx\PackageError\undefined - \errmessage{#1}\else - \PackageError{Fancyhdr}{#1}{}\fi} -\def\@fancywarning#1{% - \ifx\PackageWarning\undefined - \errmessage{#1}\else - \PackageWarning{Fancyhdr}{#1}{}\fi} - -% Usage: \@forc \var{charstring}{command to be executed for each char} -% This is similar to LaTeX's \@tfor, but expands the charstring. - -\def\@forc#1#2#3{\expandafter\f@rc\expandafter#1\expandafter{#2}{#3}} -\def\f@rc#1#2#3{\def\temp@ty{#2}\ifx\@empty\temp@ty\else - \f@@rc#1#2\f@@rc{#3}\fi} -\def\f@@rc#1#2#3\f@@rc#4{\def#1{#2}#4\f@rc#1{#3}{#4}} - -% Usage: \f@nfor\name:=list\do{body} -% Like LaTeX's \@for but an empty list is treated as a list with an empty -% element - -\newcommand{\f@nfor}[3]{\edef\@fortmp{#2}% - \expandafter\@forloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}} - -% Usage: \def@ult \cs{defaults}{argument} -% sets \cs to the characters from defaults appearing in argument -% or defaults if it would be empty. All characters are lowercased. - -\newcommand\def@ult[3]{% - \edef\temp@a{\lowercase{\edef\noexpand\temp@a{#3}}}\temp@a - \def#1{}% - \@forc\tmpf@ra{#2}% - {\expandafter\if@in\tmpf@ra\temp@a{\edef#1{#1\tmpf@ra}}{}}% - \ifx\@empty#1\def#1{#2}\fi} -% -% \if@in -% -\newcommand{\if@in}[4]{% - \edef\temp@a{#2}\def\temp@b##1#1##2\temp@b{\def\temp@b{##1}}% - \expandafter\temp@b#2#1\temp@b\ifx\temp@a\temp@b #4\else #3\fi} - -\newcommand{\fancyhead}{\@ifnextchar[{\f@ncyhf\fancyhead h}% - {\f@ncyhf\fancyhead h[]}} -\newcommand{\fancyfoot}{\@ifnextchar[{\f@ncyhf\fancyfoot f}% - {\f@ncyhf\fancyfoot f[]}} -\newcommand{\fancyhf}{\@ifnextchar[{\f@ncyhf\fancyhf{}}% - {\f@ncyhf\fancyhf{}[]}} - -% New commands for offsets added - -\newcommand{\fancyheadoffset}{\@ifnextchar[{\f@ncyhfoffs\fancyheadoffset h}% - {\f@ncyhfoffs\fancyheadoffset h[]}} -\newcommand{\fancyfootoffset}{\@ifnextchar[{\f@ncyhfoffs\fancyfootoffset f}% - {\f@ncyhfoffs\fancyfootoffset f[]}} -\newcommand{\fancyhfoffset}{\@ifnextchar[{\f@ncyhfoffs\fancyhfoffset{}}% - {\f@ncyhfoffs\fancyhfoffset{}[]}} - -% The header and footer fields are stored in command sequences with -% names of the form: \f@ncy with for [eo], from [lcr] -% and from [hf]. - -\def\f@ncyhf#1#2[#3]#4{% - \def\temp@c{}% - \@forc\tmpf@ra{#3}% - {\expandafter\if@in\tmpf@ra{eolcrhf,EOLCRHF}% - {}{\edef\temp@c{\temp@c\tmpf@ra}}}% - \ifx\@empty\temp@c\else - \@fancyerrmsg{Illegal char `\temp@c' in \string#1 argument: - [#3]}% - \fi - \f@nfor\temp@c{#3}% - {\def@ult\f@@@eo{eo}\temp@c - \if@twoside\else - \if\f@@@eo e\@fancywarning - {\string#1's `E' option without twoside option is useless}\fi\fi - \def@ult\f@@@lcr{lcr}\temp@c - \def@ult\f@@@hf{hf}{#2\temp@c}% - \@forc\f@@eo\f@@@eo - {\@forc\f@@lcr\f@@@lcr - {\@forc\f@@hf\f@@@hf - {\expandafter\fancy@def\csname - f@ncy\f@@eo\f@@lcr\f@@hf\endcsname - {#4}}}}}} - -\def\f@ncyhfoffs#1#2[#3]#4{% - \def\temp@c{}% - \@forc\tmpf@ra{#3}% - {\expandafter\if@in\tmpf@ra{eolrhf,EOLRHF}% - {}{\edef\temp@c{\temp@c\tmpf@ra}}}% - \ifx\@empty\temp@c\else - \@fancyerrmsg{Illegal char `\temp@c' in \string#1 argument: - [#3]}% - \fi - \f@nfor\temp@c{#3}% - {\def@ult\f@@@eo{eo}\temp@c - \if@twoside\else - \if\f@@@eo e\@fancywarning - {\string#1's `E' option without twoside option is useless}\fi\fi - \def@ult\f@@@lcr{lr}\temp@c - \def@ult\f@@@hf{hf}{#2\temp@c}% - \@forc\f@@eo\f@@@eo - {\@forc\f@@lcr\f@@@lcr - {\@forc\f@@hf\f@@@hf - {\expandafter\setlength\csname - f@ncyO@\f@@eo\f@@lcr\f@@hf\endcsname - {#4}}}}}% - \fancy@setoffs} - -% Fancyheadings version 1 commands. These are more or less deprecated, -% but they continue to work. - -\newcommand{\lhead}{\@ifnextchar[{\@xlhead}{\@ylhead}} -\def\@xlhead[#1]#2{\fancy@def\f@ncyelh{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyolh{#2}} -\def\@ylhead#1{\fancy@def\f@ncyelh{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyolh{#1}} - -\newcommand{\chead}{\@ifnextchar[{\@xchead}{\@ychead}} -\def\@xchead[#1]#2{\fancy@def\f@ncyech{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyoch{#2}} -\def\@ychead#1{\fancy@def\f@ncyech{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyoch{#1}} - -\newcommand{\rhead}{\@ifnextchar[{\@xrhead}{\@yrhead}} -\def\@xrhead[#1]#2{\fancy@def\f@ncyerh{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyorh{#2}} -\def\@yrhead#1{\fancy@def\f@ncyerh{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyorh{#1}} - -\newcommand{\lfoot}{\@ifnextchar[{\@xlfoot}{\@ylfoot}} -\def\@xlfoot[#1]#2{\fancy@def\f@ncyelf{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyolf{#2}} -\def\@ylfoot#1{\fancy@def\f@ncyelf{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyolf{#1}} - -\newcommand{\cfoot}{\@ifnextchar[{\@xcfoot}{\@ycfoot}} -\def\@xcfoot[#1]#2{\fancy@def\f@ncyecf{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyocf{#2}} -\def\@ycfoot#1{\fancy@def\f@ncyecf{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyocf{#1}} - -\newcommand{\rfoot}{\@ifnextchar[{\@xrfoot}{\@yrfoot}} -\def\@xrfoot[#1]#2{\fancy@def\f@ncyerf{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyorf{#2}} -\def\@yrfoot#1{\fancy@def\f@ncyerf{#1}\fancy@def\f@ncyorf{#1}} - -\newlength{\fancy@headwidth} -\let\headwidth\fancy@headwidth -\newlength{\f@ncyO@elh} -\newlength{\f@ncyO@erh} -\newlength{\f@ncyO@olh} -\newlength{\f@ncyO@orh} -\newlength{\f@ncyO@elf} -\newlength{\f@ncyO@erf} -\newlength{\f@ncyO@olf} -\newlength{\f@ncyO@orf} -\newcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.4pt} -\newcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt} -\newcommand{\footruleskip}{.3\normalbaselineskip} - -% Fancyplain stuff shouldn't be used anymore (rather -% \fancypagestyle{plain} should be used), but it must be present for -% compatibility reasons. - -\newcommand{\plainheadrulewidth}{0pt} -\newcommand{\plainfootrulewidth}{0pt} -\newif\if@fancyplain \@fancyplainfalse -\def\fancyplain#1#2{\if@fancyplain#1\else#2\fi} - -\headwidth=-123456789sp %magic constant - -% Command to reset various things in the headers: -% a.o. single spacing (taken from setspace.sty) -% and the catcode of ^^M (so that epsf files in the header work if a -% verbatim crosses a page boundary) -% It also defines a \nouppercase command that disables \uppercase and -% \Makeuppercase. It can only be used in the headers and footers. -\let\fnch@everypar\everypar% save real \everypar because of spanish.ldf -\def\fancy@reset{\fnch@everypar{}\restorecr\endlinechar=13 - \def\baselinestretch{1}% - \def\nouppercase##1{{\let\uppercase\relax\let\MakeUppercase\relax - \expandafter\let\csname MakeUppercase \endcsname\relax##1}}% - \ifx\undefined\@newbaseline% NFSS not present; 2.09 or 2e - \ifx\@normalsize\undefined \normalsize % for ucthesis.cls - \else \@normalsize \fi - \else% NFSS (2.09) present - \@newbaseline% - \fi} - -% Initialization of the head and foot text. - -% The default values still contain \fancyplain for compatibility. -\fancyhf{} % clear all -% lefthead empty on ``plain'' pages, \rightmark on even, \leftmark on odd pages -% evenhead empty on ``plain'' pages, \leftmark on even, \rightmark on odd pages -\if@twoside - \fancyhead[el,or]{\fancyplain{}{\sl\rightmark}} - \fancyhead[er,ol]{\fancyplain{}{\sl\leftmark}} -\else - \fancyhead[l]{\fancyplain{}{\sl\rightmark}} - \fancyhead[r]{\fancyplain{}{\sl\leftmark}} -\fi -\fancyfoot[c]{\rm\thepage} % page number - -% Use box 0 as a temp box and dimen 0 as temp dimen. -% This can be done, because this code will always -% be used inside another box, and therefore the changes are local. - -\def\@fancyvbox#1#2{\setbox0\vbox{#2}\ifdim\ht0>#1\@fancywarning - {\string#1 is too small (\the#1): ^^J Make it at least \the\ht0.^^J - We now make it that large for the rest of the document.^^J - This may cause the page layout to be inconsistent, however\@gobble}% - \dimen0=#1\global\setlength{#1}{\ht0}\ht0=\dimen0\fi - \box0} - -% Put together a header or footer given the left, center and -% right text, fillers at left and right and a rule. -% The \lap commands put the text into an hbox of zero size, -% so overlapping text does not generate an errormessage. -% These macros have 5 parameters: -% 1. LEFTSIDE BEARING % This determines at which side the header will stick -% out. When \fancyhfoffset is used this calculates \headwidth, otherwise -% it is \hss or \relax (after expansion). -% 2. \f@ncyolh, \f@ncyelh, \f@ncyolf or \f@ncyelf. This is the left component. -% 3. \f@ncyoch, \f@ncyech, \f@ncyocf or \f@ncyecf. This is the middle comp. -% 4. \f@ncyorh, \f@ncyerh, \f@ncyorf or \f@ncyerf. This is the right component. -% 5. RIGHTSIDE BEARING. This is always \relax or \hss (after expansion). - -\def\@fancyhead#1#2#3#4#5{#1\hbox to\headwidth{\fancy@reset - \@fancyvbox\headheight{\hbox - {\rlap{\parbox[b]{\headwidth}{\raggedright#2}}\hfill - \parbox[b]{\headwidth}{\centering#3}\hfill - \llap{\parbox[b]{\headwidth}{\raggedleft#4}}}\headrule}}#5} - -\def\@fancyfoot#1#2#3#4#5{#1\hbox to\headwidth{\fancy@reset - \@fancyvbox\footskip{\footrule - \hbox{\rlap{\parbox[t]{\headwidth}{\raggedright#2}}\hfill - \parbox[t]{\headwidth}{\centering#3}\hfill - \llap{\parbox[t]{\headwidth}{\raggedleft#4}}}}}#5} - -\def\headrule{{\if@fancyplain\let\headrulewidth\plainheadrulewidth\fi - \hrule\@height\headrulewidth\@width\headwidth \vskip-\headrulewidth}} - -\def\footrule{{\if@fancyplain\let\footrulewidth\plainfootrulewidth\fi - \vskip-\footruleskip\vskip-\footrulewidth - \hrule\@width\headwidth\@height\footrulewidth\vskip\footruleskip}} - -\def\ps@fancy{% -\@ifundefined{@chapapp}{\let\@chapapp\chaptername}{}%for amsbook -% -% Define \MakeUppercase for old LaTeXen. -% Note: we used \def rather than \let, so that \let\uppercase\relax (from -% the version 1 documentation) will still work. -% -\@ifundefined{MakeUppercase}{\def\MakeUppercase{\uppercase}}{}% -\@ifundefined{chapter}{\def\sectionmark##1{\markboth -{\MakeUppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth>\z@ - \thesection\hskip 1em\relax \fi ##1}}{}}% -\def\subsectionmark##1{\markright {\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne - \thesubsection\hskip 1em\relax \fi ##1}}}% -{\def\chaptermark##1{\markboth {\MakeUppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth>\m@ne - \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ \fi ##1}}{}}% -\def\sectionmark##1{\markright{\MakeUppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@ - \thesection. \ \fi ##1}}}}% -%\csname ps@headings\endcsname % use \ps@headings defaults if they exist -\ps@@fancy -\gdef\ps@fancy{\@fancyplainfalse\ps@@fancy}% -% Initialize \headwidth if the user didn't -% -\ifdim\headwidth<0sp -% -% This catches the case that \headwidth hasn't been initialized and the -% case that the user added something to \headwidth in the expectation that -% it was initialized to \textwidth. We compensate this now. This loses if -% the user intended to multiply it by a factor. But that case is more -% likely done by saying something like \headwidth=1.2\textwidth. -% The doc says you have to change \headwidth after the first call to -% \pagestyle{fancy}. This code is just to catch the most common cases were -% that requirement is violated. -% - \global\advance\headwidth123456789sp\global\advance\headwidth\textwidth -\fi} -\def\ps@fancyplain{\ps@fancy \let\ps@plain\ps@plain@fancy} -\def\ps@plain@fancy{\@fancyplaintrue\ps@@fancy} -\let\ps@@empty\ps@empty -\def\ps@@fancy{% -\ps@@empty % This is for amsbook/amsart, which do strange things with \topskip -\def\@mkboth{\protect\markboth}% -\def\@oddhead{\@fancyhead\fancy@Oolh\f@ncyolh\f@ncyoch\f@ncyorh\fancy@Oorh}% -\def\@oddfoot{\@fancyfoot\fancy@Oolf\f@ncyolf\f@ncyocf\f@ncyorf\fancy@Oorf}% -\def\@evenhead{\@fancyhead\fancy@Oelh\f@ncyelh\f@ncyech\f@ncyerh\fancy@Oerh}% -\def\@evenfoot{\@fancyfoot\fancy@Oelf\f@ncyelf\f@ncyecf\f@ncyerf\fancy@Oerf}% -} -% Default definitions for compatibility mode: -% These cause the header/footer to take the defined \headwidth as width -% And to shift in the direction of the marginpar area - -\def\fancy@Oolh{\if@reversemargin\hss\else\relax\fi} -\def\fancy@Oorh{\if@reversemargin\relax\else\hss\fi} -\let\fancy@Oelh\fancy@Oorh -\let\fancy@Oerh\fancy@Oolh - -\let\fancy@Oolf\fancy@Oolh -\let\fancy@Oorf\fancy@Oorh -\let\fancy@Oelf\fancy@Oelh -\let\fancy@Oerf\fancy@Oerh - -% New definitions for the use of \fancyhfoffset -% These calculate the \headwidth from \textwidth and the specified offsets. - -\def\fancy@offsolh{\headwidth=\textwidth\advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@olh - \advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@orh\hskip-\f@ncyO@olh} -\def\fancy@offselh{\headwidth=\textwidth\advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@elh - \advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@erh\hskip-\f@ncyO@elh} - -\def\fancy@offsolf{\headwidth=\textwidth\advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@olf - \advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@orf\hskip-\f@ncyO@olf} -\def\fancy@offself{\headwidth=\textwidth\advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@elf - \advance\headwidth\f@ncyO@erf\hskip-\f@ncyO@elf} - -\def\fancy@setoffs{% -% Just in case \let\headwidth\textwidth was used - \fancy@gbl\let\headwidth\fancy@headwidth - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oolh\fancy@offsolh - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oelh\fancy@offselh - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oorh\hss - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oerh\hss - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oolf\fancy@offsolf - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oelf\fancy@offself - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oorf\hss - \fancy@gbl\let\fancy@Oerf\hss} - -\newif\iffootnote -\let\latex@makecol\@makecol -\def\@makecol{\ifvoid\footins\footnotetrue\else\footnotefalse\fi -\let\topfloat\@toplist\let\botfloat\@botlist\latex@makecol} -\def\iftopfloat#1#2{\ifx\topfloat\empty #2\else #1\fi} -\def\ifbotfloat#1#2{\ifx\botfloat\empty #2\else #1\fi} -\def\iffloatpage#1#2{\if@fcolmade #1\else #2\fi} - -\newcommand{\fancypagestyle}[2]{% - \@namedef{ps@#1}{\let\fancy@gbl\relax#2\relax\ps@fancy}} diff --git a/templates/iclr2026/natbib.sty b/templates/iclr2026/natbib.sty deleted file mode 100644 index ff0d0b9..0000000 --- a/templates/iclr2026/natbib.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1246 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `natbib.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% natbib.dtx (with options: `package,all') -%% ============================================= -%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: -%% -%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms -%% of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN -%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either -%% version 1 of the License, or any later version. -%% -%% This is a generated file. -%% It may not be distributed without the original source file natbib.dtx. -%% -%% Full documentation can be obtained by LaTeXing that original file. -%% Only a few abbreviated comments remain here to describe the usage. -%% ============================================= -%% Copyright 1993-2009 Patrick W Daly -%% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung -%% Max-Planck-Str. 2 -%% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau -%% Germany -%% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01] -\ProvidesPackage{natbib} - [2009/07/16 8.31 (PWD, AO)] - - % This package reimplements the LaTeX \cite command to be used for various - % citation styles, both author-year and numerical. It accepts BibTeX - % output intended for many other packages, and therefore acts as a - % general, all-purpose citation-style interface. - % - % With standard numerical .bst files, only numerical citations are - % possible. With an author-year .bst file, both numerical and - % author-year citations are possible. - % - % If author-year citations are selected, \bibitem must have one of the - % following forms: - % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}... - % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Williams]{key}... - % \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}... - % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Williams}{Jones - % et al.}{1990}]{key}... - % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... - % \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... - % \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al., }1990]{key}... - % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Williams}{1990}{key}... - % - % This is either to be made up manually, or to be generated by an - % appropriate .bst file with BibTeX. - % Author-year mode || Numerical mode - % Then, \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990) || Jones et al. [21] - % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990) || [21] - % Multiple citations as normal: - % \citep{key1,key2} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990; Smith, 1989) || [21,24] - % or (Jones et al., 1990, 1991) || [21,24] - % or (Jones et al., 1990a,b) || [21,24] - % \cite{key} is the equivalent of \citet{key} in author-year mode - % and of \citep{key} in numerical mode - % Full author lists may be forced with \citet* or \citep*, e.g. - % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Williams, 1990) - % Optional notes as: - % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2) - % \citep[e.g.,][]{key} ==>> (e.g., Jones et al., 1990) - % \citep[see][pg. 34]{key}==>> (see Jones et al., 1990, pg. 34) - % (Note: in standard LaTeX, only one note is allowed, after the ref. - % Here, one note is like the standard, two make pre- and post-notes.) - % \citealt{key} ==>> Jones et al. 1990 - % \citealt*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Williams 1990 - % \citealp{key} ==>> Jones et al., 1990 - % \citealp*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Williams, 1990 - % Additional citation possibilities (both author-year and numerical modes) - % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al. - % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Williams - % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990 - % \citeyearpar{key} ==>> (1990) - % \citetext{priv. comm.} ==>> (priv. comm.) - % \citenum{key} ==>> 11 [non-superscripted] - % Note: full author lists depends on whether the bib style supports them; - % if not, the abbreviated list is printed even when full requested. - % - % For names like della Robbia at the start of a sentence, use - % \Citet{dRob98} ==>> Della Robbia (1998) - % \Citep{dRob98} ==>> (Della Robbia, 1998) - % \Citeauthor{dRob98} ==>> Della Robbia - % - % - % Citation aliasing is achieved with - % \defcitealias{key}{text} - % \citetalias{key} ==>> text - % \citepalias{key} ==>> (text) - % - % Defining the citation mode and punctual (citation style) - % \setcitestyle{} - % Example: \setcitestyle{square,semicolon} - % Alternatively: - % Use \bibpunct with 6 mandatory arguments: - % 1. opening bracket for citation - % 2. closing bracket - % 3. citation separator (for multiple citations in one \cite) - % 4. the letter n for numerical styles, s for superscripts - % else anything for author-year - % 5. punctuation between authors and date - % 6. punctuation between years (or numbers) when common authors missing - % One optional argument is the character coming before post-notes. It - % appears in square braces before all other arguments. May be left off. - % Example (and default) \bibpunct[, ]{(}{)}{;}{a}{,}{,} - % - % To make this automatic for a given bib style, named newbib, say, make - % a local configuration file, natbib.cfg, with the definition - % \newcommand{\bibstyle@newbib}{\bibpunct...} - % Then the \bibliographystyle{newbib} will cause \bibstyle@newbib to - % be called on THE NEXT LATEX RUN (via the aux file). - % - % Such preprogrammed definitions may be invoked anywhere in the text - % by calling \citestyle{newbib}. This is only useful if the style specified - % differs from that in \bibliographystyle. - % - % With \citeindextrue and \citeindexfalse, one can control whether the - % \cite commands make an automatic entry of the citation in the .idx - % indexing file. For this, \makeindex must also be given in the preamble. - % - % Package Options: (for selecting punctuation) - % round - round parentheses are used (default) - % square - square brackets are used [option] - % curly - curly braces are used {option} - % angle - angle brackets are used